WO2020105457A1 - Transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method - Google Patents

Transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method

Info

Publication number
WO2020105457A1
WO2020105457A1 PCT/JP2019/043695 JP2019043695W WO2020105457A1 WO 2020105457 A1 WO2020105457 A1 WO 2020105457A1 JP 2019043695 W JP2019043695 W JP 2019043695W WO 2020105457 A1 WO2020105457 A1 WO 2020105457A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
photosensitive resin
resin layer
transfer material
pattern
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2019/043695
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
洋行 海鉾
藤本 進二
一真 両角
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2020558258A priority Critical patent/JPWO2020105457A1/en
Priority to CN201980075793.4A priority patent/CN113056373A/en
Publication of WO2020105457A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020105457A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/18Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin characterised by the use of special additives
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08KUse of inorganic or non-macromolecular organic substances as compounding ingredients
    • C08K5/00Use of organic ingredients
    • C08K5/02Halogenated hydrocarbons
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L101/00Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • C08L101/12Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds characterised by physical features, e.g. anisotropy, viscosity or electrical conductivity
    • C08L101/14Compositions of unspecified macromolecular compounds characterised by physical features, e.g. anisotropy, viscosity or electrical conductivity the macromolecular compounds being water soluble or water swellable, e.g. aqueous gels
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a transfer material, a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
  • a display device organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.
  • a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device
  • an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part a wiring of a peripheral wiring part and an extraction wiring part
  • a conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
  • a patterned layer is formed by a small number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape. Therefore, a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material.
  • a method of developing after exposing through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
  • Patent Document 1 has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin composition layer in this order, and the photosensitive resin composition layer has an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. Containing a polymer having a structural unit, and a photoacid generator, the intermediate layer is water-soluble or alkali-soluble, and a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group or an alcoholic hydroxyl group not directly linked to the main chain Photosensitive transfer materials containing Resin C containing are described.
  • Patent Document 2 At least one transfer layer is provided on a temporary support, and the maximum peeling force when peeling the temporary support is 0.98 to 5.39 mN / cm in a 180 ° peel method. Certain transfer laminates are described.
  • Patent Document 1 International Publication No. 2018/179640
  • Patent Document 2 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-73022
  • the problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a transfer material having less streaks on the surface to be transferred. Further, another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a resin pattern using the above transfer material, a method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and a method for manufacturing a touch panel.
  • Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
  • the surfactant contains a compound having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • the surfactant has a solubility of 1 g or more in 100 g of water at 25 ° C.
  • ⁇ 4> The content of the surfactant according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 3>, which is 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer.
  • ⁇ 5> The transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the surfactant is a surfactant having a fluoroalkyl group and an alkyleneoxy group.
  • ⁇ 6> The transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, wherein the surfactant is a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  • ⁇ 7> Any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, wherein the content of the polymer component in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 75% by mass or more based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the transfer material described in 1. ⁇ 8> Any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, in which the positive photosensitive resin layer contains a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photo-acid generator.
  • the transfer material according to one. ⁇ 9> The transfer material according to ⁇ 8>, wherein the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas A1 to A3.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 14 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 1 is a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 15 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, and R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 24 is independently a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, It represents an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
  • a method of manufacturing a resin pattern comprising: a step of pattern-exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer, and a step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, in this order.
  • the outermost layer on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9> is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer.
  • a step of patterning the positive photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and the resin pattern are arranged. And a step of etching the conductive layer in a non-existing region in this order.
  • the outermost layer on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9> is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer.
  • a step of patterning the positive photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and the resin pattern are arranged. And a step of etching the conductive layer in a non-existing region in this order.
  • the numerical range represented by “to” means a range including the numerical values before and after “to” as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • “(meth) acryl” represents both acryl and methacryl, or either, and "(meth) acrylate” represents both an acrylate and a methacrylate.
  • the amount of each component in the composition is the sum of the corresponding plurality of substances present in the composition, unless a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
  • the term “process” is included not only in an independent process but also in the case where the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
  • the notation in which substitution and non-substitution are not included includes not only those having no substituent but also those having a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure as used herein includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams.
  • the light used for the exposure generally, the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), active rays (active energy rays) such as X-rays and electron rays are used.
  • far ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser
  • EUV light extreme ultraviolet rays
  • active energy rays active energy rays
  • the chemical structural formula in the present specification may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
  • “mass%” and “weight%” have the same meaning
  • “mass part” and “weight part” have the same meaning.
  • a combination of two or more preferable aspects is a more preferable aspect.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (both manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise specified.
  • the gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer was used to detect the solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) with a differential refractometer, and the molecular weight was calculated using polystyrene as a standard substance.
  • the transfer material (also referred to as “photosensitive transfer material”) according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer containing a water-soluble resin, and a positive photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “photosensitive resin layer”). And) in this order, and the intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom.
  • the transfer material according to the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive transfer material.
  • the positive type photosensitive resin layer is a hard layer containing a resin as a main component and has low fluidity.
  • Shape defects such as stripes which are influenced by the shape of the intermediate layer when the intermediate layer is formed reflect similar shape defects to the positive photosensitive resin layer, and further When the layer of No. 1 is further formed, similar shape defects may be reflected up to that layer.
  • the surface to be transferred is The present inventors have found that there is a problem that streaks occur in the above.
  • the negative photosensitive resin layer described in Patent Document 2 and the like is a layer containing a polymerizable compound and has high fluidity, and thus streaks and the like generated during the formation of the intermediate layer during the formation of the negative photosensitive resin layer.
  • the influence of the shape defect is not reflected, and the negative photosensitive resin layer is flattened, so that the problem of streaks on the transferred surface does not occur as described above. Therefore, the problem of reducing streaks on the transferred surface is a problem peculiar to the positive photosensitive resin layer.
  • the “transfer surface” is also referred to as a “transfer surface”, and for example, if the transfer material has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, This is the surface on the positive photosensitive resin layer side.
  • the transfer material having the above-mentioned structure can provide a transfer material having few streaks on the surface to be transferred.
  • the intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom
  • Generation of streaks on the surface of the intermediate layer is suppressed
  • deterioration of the surface shape of the positive photosensitive resin layer due to the generation of streaks is suppressed
  • a transfer material having few streaks on the surface to be transferred is obtained. It is estimated to be. It is presumed that the above-mentioned generation of streaks is caused by convection of the intermediate layer forming layer composition during the formation of the intermediate layer and uneven volatilization of the solvent contained in the intermediate layer forming layer composition.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer is a hard layer containing a resin as a main component and has low fluidity, so that the influence of the stripes generated in the intermediate layer is reflected on the transfer surface, and Occurs.
  • Generation of the streak can be suppressed by including the surfactant having a fluorine atom in the intermediate layer. Since the generation of the streaks is suppressed, at the time of transfer, at the bonded portion on the transfer surface, it is possible to suppress bubbles from entering the streaks, excellent adhesion on the transfer surface, and a transfer material as an etching resist.
  • the transfer material according to the present disclosure has excellent adhesiveness in transfer due to the above-described configuration, and has few wiring defects when the transfer material is used as the etching resist.
  • the transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer.
  • the intermediate layer contains a fluorine atom-containing surfactant and a water-soluble resin, and preferably contains a fluorine atom-containing surfactant, a water-soluble resin, and a dye described below.
  • the intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom include compounds having a group having a fluorine atom and a hydrophilic group.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom may have only one group having a fluorine atom or may have two or more groups.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom may have only one hydrophilic group or two or more hydrophilic groups.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom preferably has a fluoroalkyl group or a fluoroaryl group as a group having a fluorine atom, more preferably a fluoroalkyl group, and a perfluoroalkyl group. It is particularly preferable to have a group.
  • the perfluoroalkyl group is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 18 carbon atoms, A perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 6 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom is an ionic surfactant having a fluorine atom or a nonionic surfactant having a fluorine atom, from the viewpoints of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface during transfer. Is more preferable, an anionic surfactant having a fluorine atom or a nonionic surfactant having a fluorine atom is more preferable, and a nonionic surfactant having a fluorine atom is particularly preferable.
  • the ionic hydrophilic group, hydrophilicity, suppression of streak generation, and from the viewpoint of adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer preferably an acid group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, Alternatively, a phosphoric acid group is more preferable, and a phosphoric acid group is particularly preferable.
  • an alkyleneoxy group or a hydroxy group is preferable, and an alkyleneoxy group is More preferably, a polyalkyleneoxy group is particularly preferable.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom is at least selected from the group consisting of an acid group and an alkyleneoxy group as the hydrophilic group, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks, and the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer. It preferably has one group, more preferably has an alkyleneoxy group, and particularly preferably has a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  • the alkyleneoxy group is preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group.
  • the polyalkyleneoxy group is preferably a polyethyleneoxy group, a polypropyleneoxy group, or a group formed by bonding one or more ethyleneoxy groups and one or more propyleneoxy groups.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferably a surfactant having a fluoroalkyl group and an alkyleneoxy group, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer, and perfluoro
  • a surfactant having an alkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy group is more preferable, and a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms and a polyalkyleneoxy group is particularly preferable.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one type of surfactant having a fluorine atom, or two or more types thereof.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom in the intermediate layer preferably contains a compound having a molecular weight of 500 or more, and a compound having a molecular weight of 700 or more, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. Is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable to include a compound having a molecular weight of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferably a compound having a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 20,000 or less, and a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 or less, from the viewpoint of adhesion on the transfer surface during transfer. More preferably, it is a compound.
  • the solubility of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant in 100 g of water at 25 ° C. is preferably 0.5 g or more, from the viewpoint of suppressing streak generation and suppressing the precipitation of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant, 1 g or more Is more preferable.
  • the surfactant having a fluorine atom each series of Megafac (manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be preferably mentioned.
  • the content of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant is from 0.05% by mass to 2% with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer.
  • the content is preferably 0.0% by mass, more preferably 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.2% by mass to 0.4% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer contains a water-soluble resin.
  • the water-soluble resin include cellulose resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinylpyrrolidone resins, acrylamide resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and resins such as copolymers thereof. Is mentioned. Of these, a cellulose resin is preferable, and at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose is more preferable.
  • water-soluble resin a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably mentioned.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more
  • alkali-soluble means sodium carbonate at 22 ° C. It means that the solubility in 100 g of a 1 mass% aqueous solution is 0.1 g or more.
  • water-soluble or alkali-soluble may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or water-soluble and alkali-soluble. The solubility of the water-soluble resin in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C.
  • the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin preferably has a hydrophilic group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a hydrophilic group.
  • the hydrophilic group include an acid group which may form a salt, a hydroxy group, a polyalkyleneoxy group, an amide group, and a basic group which may form a salt, and the like, and from the viewpoint of adhesion, It is preferable to have at least an acid group or a hydroxy group that may form a salt.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin or two or more types.
  • the content of the water-soluble resin, the shape of the obtained pattern, the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer, and from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer It is preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, and more preferably 50% by mass to 100% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, and a dye (simply referred to as “dye It is also referred to as ".”
  • Dyes "maximum absorption wavelength is changed by acid, base or radical” means that the dye in the colored state is decolored by acid, base or radical, the dye in the decolored state is colored by acid, base or radical. And the aspect in which the dye in the coloring state changes to the coloring state of another hue.
  • the dye may be a compound that changes from the decolored state to a color upon exposure to light, or a compound that changes from the decolored state to a color upon exposure to light.
  • a dye whose color development or decolorization state is changed by introducing an acid, a base or a radical into the intermediate layer by exposure may be used, and a property in the system by introducing an acid, a base or a radical (
  • it may be a dye whose color-developed or decolored state changes when pH) changes.
  • it may be a dye in which an acid, a base, or a radical is directly given as a stimulus to directly change the state of color development or decolorization without exposure.
  • the dye may be a compound that develops color upon exposure to light or a compound that disappears upon exposure to light, but from the viewpoint of visibility, it is preferable that it is a compound that disappears upon exposure to light. It is more preferable to use a latent dye that is decolorized by the acid generated from the dye, that is, a pH-sensitive dye that is decolorized by changing the pH due to the generation of acid.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development of the dye is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 nm or more and 700 nm or less, and further preferably 550 nm or more and 650 nm or less from the viewpoint of visibility. preferable. Further, the dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more maximum absorption wavelengths.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength having the largest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 450 nm or more.
  • the method for measuring the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure a transmission spectrum in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an atmosphere of air. , The wavelength at which the light intensity becomes minimum (maximum absorption wavelength) shall be measured.
  • Examples of dyes that develop color upon exposure include leuco compounds.
  • Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, and anthraquinone dyes.
  • leuco compounds are preferable as the dye from the viewpoint of visibility.
  • leuco compound examples include triarylmethane-based (eg, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diphenylmethane-based, rhodamine lactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, leucoauramine-based leuco compounds.
  • triarylmethane-based eg, triphenylmethane-based
  • spiropyran-based fluoran-based
  • diphenylmethane-based rhodamine lactam-based
  • indolylphthalide-based examples of the leuco compounds
  • leuco compounds having a triarylmethane skeleton are preferable, and triphenylmethane dyes are more preferable.
  • a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring is preferable, and a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring that is opened or closed is preferable, and a sultone ring is used. It is more preferable to use a leuco compound having a sultone ring that is closed and decolorized.
  • the dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to the precipitation of the dye.
  • the solubility of the dye in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is preferably 1 g or more, more preferably 5 g or more.
  • the intermediate layer may contain one kind of dye or two or more kinds of dye.
  • the content of the dye in the intermediate layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, and is 0.1% by mass to 8% by mass, based on the total mass of the intermediate layer. It is more preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass, further preferably 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer may contain a surfactant other than the surfactant having a fluorine atom.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic) and amphoteric surfactants can be used, and known surfactants can be used.
  • the content of the other surfactant in the intermediate layer is preferably smaller than the content of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks. In the case of containing other surfactant, the content of the other surfactant is 0 relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer. It is preferably 0.01% by mass or more and less than 2.0% by mass.
  • the intermediate layer can include an inorganic filler.
  • the inorganic filler in the present disclosure is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include silica particles, aluminum oxide particles and zirconium oxide particles, and silica particles are more preferable. From the viewpoint of transparency, particles having a small particle size are preferable, and particles having an average particle size of 100 nm or less are more preferable. For example, if it is a commercially available product, Snowtex (registered trademark) is preferably used.
  • the volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer is 5% to 90% with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 10% to 80%, more preferably 15% to 70%, particularly preferably 20% to 60%. As will be described later, when the number of intermediate layers is two, the volume fraction of the particles in all the intermediate layers (volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer.
  • the total volume of the intermediate layer is preferably 2% to 90%, more preferably 3% to 80%, further preferably 5% to 20%, and 10% to 20%. It is particularly preferable that
  • the intermediate layer can include a pH adjuster.
  • the pH adjusting agent in the present disclosure is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, organic amines, organic ammonium salts and the like. Sodium hydroxide is preferred from the viewpoint of water solubility. From the viewpoint of the adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, organic ammonium salts are preferable.
  • organic ammonium salt examples include a primary ammonium salt, a secondary ammonium salt, a tertiary ammonium salt, and a quaternary ammonium salt, and a quaternary ammonium salt is preferable.
  • Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt include tetraalkylammonium hydroxide which may have a substituent, and specific examples thereof include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, triethylmethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, Examples include tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, hexadecyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, benzyltrimethylammonium, benzyltriethylammonium, tris (2-hydroxyethyl) methylammonium hydroxide, etc. .
  • tetraalkylammonium hydroxide having an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms preferably 10 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 10 to 25 carbon atoms
  • substituent include an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, a phenyl group), a hydroxy group and the like.
  • the average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and pattern formability. ⁇ 2 ⁇ m is particularly preferred.
  • the average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably thinner than the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the intermediate layer may have two or more layers.
  • the average thickness of each layer is not particularly limited as long as it is within the above range, but of the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, the layer closest to the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the average thickness of is preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m to 2 ⁇ m from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability. Particularly preferred.
  • the cross section in the direction perpendicular to the surface direction of the transfer material is observed and measured by a scanning electron microscope (SEM).
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • the intermediate layer in the present disclosure can be formed by adjusting, coating and drying an intermediate layer-forming composition containing components necessary for forming the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent. It is possible to prepare a composition for forming an intermediate layer for forming an intermediate layer by mixing the respective components and a water-soluble solvent in a predetermined ratio and by an arbitrary method and stirring and dissolving. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the obtained solutions in a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0 ⁇ m or the like.
  • the intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer forming composition to the temporary support and drying the composition.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating and the like.
  • the intermediate layer forming composition preferably contains a component contained in the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent.
  • a water-soluble solvent is contained in each component to adjust the viscosity, and the intermediate layer can be suitably formed by coating and drying.
  • the water-soluble solvent include water and alcohol compounds having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and water is preferable.
  • the alcohol compound having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, n-pentanol and n-hexanol, which are composed of methanol, ethanol, n-propanol and isopropanol. At least one selected from the group is preferable.
  • the transfer material according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and a known positive photosensitive resin layer can be used.
  • the photosensitive resin layer used in the present disclosure is, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, an acid-decomposable resin, that is, a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator. It is preferable that the chemical amplification positive type photosensitive resin layer contains a photo-acid generator and a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • the photo-acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below have an acid generated in response to actinic radiation (actinic rays) as a catalyst for deprotection of the protected acid group in the polymer. Since it acts, the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, which is a large value such as 10 to the power of so-called chemical amplification. As a result, high sensitivity is obtained.
  • actinic radiation actinic rays
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer contains a polymer (also simply referred to as "polymer A1") having a structural unit (also referred to as "structural unit A”) having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. Is preferred.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain another polymer.
  • the polymer A1 having the structural unit A and other polymers are collectively referred to as a “polymer component”.
  • the acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer A1 undergoes a deprotection reaction to become an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acid substance such as an acid generated by exposure.
  • This acid group enables dissolution in the developer.
  • the polymer A1 is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester.
  • a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester for example, the structural unit derived from a styrene compound, the structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
  • preferred embodiments of the structural unit A will be described.
  • the polymer component preferably contains a polymer A1 having a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer A1 having the structural unit A, it is possible to obtain a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer having extremely high sensitivity.
  • the polymer A1 contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer may be only one kind or two or more kinds.
  • known groups can be used and are not particularly limited. Preferred specific acid groups include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group (also referred to as "phenolic hydroxy group").
  • the acid-decomposable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal-type functional group such as a 1-alkoxyalkyl group, a tetrahydropyranyl group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl group) or an acid-decomposable group.
  • a difficult group for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl group, a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group such as a tert-butyloxycarbonyl group
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variation in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by any of the following formulas A1 to A3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may combine to form a cyclic ether
  • R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 15 represents a substituent
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. And R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic ether, and R 24 is independently a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. ..
  • the acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group is preferably a carboxy group protected by an acid-decomposable group, which is a structure that protects in the form of acetal, from the viewpoint of acid decomposition rate and sensitivity.
  • R 31 or R 32 when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R 31 and R 32 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic ether, and it is preferable that R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are linked to each other to form a cyclic ether.
  • the number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
  • X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable.
  • the arylene group may have a substituent.
  • the structural unit A represented by the above formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected by an acid-decomposable group. When the polymer A1 contains the structural unit A represented by the formula A3, the sensitivity during pattern formation is excellent, and the resolution is further excellent.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A1 can be further lowered. More specifically, with respect to the total amount of the structural unit A contained in the polymer A1, the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities.
  • the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure, more preferably a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring structure, and more preferably a tetrahydrofuran ring structure, from the viewpoint of sensitivity.
  • a group is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit A in the polymer component including the polymer A1 is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and 10% by mass to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component. Is more preferable, 15% by mass to 50% by mass is further preferable, and 20% by mass to 40% by mass is particularly preferable. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer component containing the polymer A1 can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer A1 may include a structural unit having an acid group (also referred to as “structural unit B”).
  • the structural unit B is a structural unit containing a protecting group, for example, an acid group not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group having no protecting group.
  • the acid group in the present specification means a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less.
  • the acid group is preferably incorporated in the polymer A1 as a structural unit containing an acid group (structural unit B) using a monomer capable of forming an acid group.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably ⁇ 5 or more.
  • the polymer A1 contains the structural unit A and a structural unit B having an acid group having no protective group as a copolymerization component, and has a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower, thereby containing the polymer A1.
  • the mold-type photosensitive resin layer has better resolution and sensitivity during pattern formation while maintaining good transferability and releasability from the temporary support.
  • the acid group examples include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among them, at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of carboxy group and phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
  • Introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer A1 can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
  • the structural unit containing an acid group, which is the structural unit B is derived from a structural unit derived from a styrene compound or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound with an acid group, or derived from (meth) acrylic acid. It is more preferably a structural unit.
  • the structural unit B a structural unit having a carboxy group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity during pattern formation becomes better.
  • the monomer having an acid group capable of forming the structural unit B is not limited to the examples described above.
  • the structural unit B contained in the polymer A1 may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the polymer A1 preferably contains the structural unit having an acid group (structural unit B) in an amount of 0.01% by mass to 20% by mass, and 0.01% by mass to 15% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer A1. It is more preferable that the content is 0.01 to 10% by mass. Within the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer A1 can be confirmed by an intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer A1 contains other structural units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the structural unit C) other than the structural units A and B described above within a range that does not impair the effects of the transfer material according to the present disclosure. May be included.
  • the monomer forming the structural unit C is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, and unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester.
  • Bicyclo unsaturated compounds maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
  • various properties of the polymer A1 can be adjusted.
  • the Tg of the polymer A1 can be easily adjusted.
  • the photosensitive resin layer containing the polymer A1 maintains the transferability and the removability from the temporary support at a good level, and the resolution and sensitivity during pattern formation. Will be better.
  • the polymer A1 may include only one type of the structural unit C or may include two or more types of the structural unit C.
  • the structural unit C is specifically styrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, methyl (meth) acrylate, ( Ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-Hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile
  • the structural unit C preferably contains a structural unit having a basic group.
  • the basic group is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom, more preferably an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, An aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group is more preferable, and an aliphatic amino group is particularly preferable.
  • the aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution, a secondary amino group, or, It is preferably a tertiary amino group.
  • the aromatic amino group is preferably an anilino group, a monoalkylanilino group, or a dialkylanilino group, and more preferably a monoalkylanilino group or a dialkylanilino group.
  • the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring in the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group is preferably a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring or a triazole ring, more preferably a pyridine ring or an imidazole ring, and a pyridine ring Is particularly preferable.
  • the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group may further have a substituent on the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring.
  • the substituent is not particularly limited, but an alkyl group is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable.
  • the monomer forming the structural unit having a basic group include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, and acrylic acid 2 , 2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, methacrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl acrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl acrylate, 2- (diisopropy
  • the structural unit C a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material.
  • the monomer that forms these structural units include styrene, methylstyrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl (meth) acrylate. , And benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • the structural unit C is preferably a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • alkyl (meth) acrylate having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion.
  • Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the content of the structural unit C in the polymer component is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the polymer component.
  • the lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesiveness are further improved.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A1 according to the present disclosure is preferably 20 ° C. or higher, and more preferably 20 ° C. or higher and 90 ° C. or lower, from the viewpoint of further enhancing the resolution and the effect of the present disclosure. Is more preferable, 20 ° C. or more and 60 ° C. or less is more preferable, and 30 ° C. or more and 50 ° C. or less is particularly preferable.
  • Tg of the polymer in the present disclosure As a method of adjusting the Tg of the polymer in the present disclosure to the preferable range described above, for example, from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit, a FOX formula is obtained. It is possible to control the Tg of the desired polymer using the guidelines.
  • Tg of the homopolymer of the first constitutional unit contained in the polymer is Tg1
  • the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first constitutional unit W1
  • Tg of the homopolymer of the second constitutional unit Tg of the homopolymer of the second constitutional unit.
  • Is Tg2 and the mass fraction of the copolymer of the second constitutional unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first constitutional unit and the second constitutional unit is It can be estimated according to the formula.
  • FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
  • a copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer using the above-mentioned FOX formula. It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
  • the acid value of the polymer A1 is preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 100 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 50 mgKOH / g or less, and 0 mgKOH / g or more 20 mgKOH / g. It is more preferably at most g, particularly preferably at least 0 mgKOH / g and at most 10 mgKOH / g.
  • the acid value of the polymer in the present disclosure represents the mass of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acidic component per 1 g of the polymer.
  • the solution is neutralized and titrated with a 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution at 25 ° C.
  • the acid value is calculated by the following formula.
  • A 56.11 ⁇ Vs ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ f / w
  • A Acid value (mgKOH / g)
  • Vs amount of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution used for titration (mL)
  • f titer of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution
  • w mass of measurement sample (g) (solid content conversion)
  • the molecular weight of the polymer A1 is a polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight, and is preferably 10,000 or more and 60,000 or less, more preferably 15,000 or more and 60,000 or less, from the viewpoint of more exerting the effect in the present disclosure. It is more preferably 20,000 or more and 50,000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer in the present disclosure can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available devices can be used as the measuring device. Measurement techniques are known to those skilled in the art.
  • the weight average molecular weight is measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) using HLC (registered trademark) -8220 GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a measuring device and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4) as a column.
  • THF tetrahydrofuran
  • the measurement conditions are as follows: a sample concentration of 0.2 mass%, a flow rate of 0.35 ml / min, a sample injection amount of 10 ⁇ L, and a measurement temperature of 40 ° C., using a differential refractive index (RI) detector.
  • the calibration curve is “standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “A-5000”, It can be manufactured using any of the seven samples of "A-2500” and "A-1000".
  • the ratio (dispersion) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A1 is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the production method (synthesis method) of the polymer A1 is not particularly limited, but an example thereof is a monomer for forming the structural unit A, and optionally a polymerizable monomer for forming the other structural unit C. It can be synthesized by polymerizing using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a monomer. It can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
  • the content of the polymer component in the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is 75% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface during transfer. % Or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, further preferably 90% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 99.9% by mass.
  • the content of the polymer A1 in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 75% by mass to 99.9% by mass based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of suppressing wiring defects and resolution. %, More preferably 80% by mass to 99% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 95% by mass.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer does not include, as a polymer component, a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, in addition to the polymer A1, as long as the effect of the transfer material according to the present disclosure is not impaired. It may further contain a polymer (sometimes referred to as "other polymer"). Unless otherwise specified, the polymer component in the present disclosure is meant to include, in addition to the polymer A1, other polymers optionally added. The compounds corresponding to the cross-linking agent, the dispersant, and the surfactant, which will be described later, are not included in the polymer component even if they are polymer compounds. When the positive photosensitive resin layer contains another polymer, the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less, based on all the polymer components. Is more preferably 20% by mass or less.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer in addition to the polymer A1, or may contain two or more types thereof.
  • polyhydroxystyrene can be used, and commercially available SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer).
  • SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F above, manufactured by Sartomer.
  • ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 all produced by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • Joncryl 690, Joncr. , Joncryl 67, and Joncryl 586 can also be used.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photo-acid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid when irradiated with an actinic ray such as an ultraviolet ray, a far ultraviolet ray, an X-ray or an electron beam.
  • the photo-acid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm to generate an acid, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photo-acid generator which is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, when it is used in combination with a sensitizer, it is a compound which is sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid. It can be preferably used in combination.
  • the photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less. Particularly preferred are photoacid generators that generate the above acid.
  • the lower limit of pKa is not particularly limited, but is preferably -10.0 or more, for example.
  • Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
  • the ionic photoacid generator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
  • nonionic photoacid generators examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, and imidosulfonate compounds include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-221494A.
  • oxime sulfonate compound those described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be preferably used.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of onium salt compounds and oxime sulfonate compounds, and more preferably contains oxime sulfonate compounds. ..
  • examples of preferable photoacid generators include photoacid generators having the following structures.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of photoacid generator alone, or may contain two or more types. From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the content of the photo-acid generator in the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain other additives, if necessary, in addition to the polymer component containing the polymer A1, the photoacid generator and the solvent.
  • additives known ones can be used, and examples thereof include a plasticizer, a sensitizer, a heterocyclic compound, an alkoxysilane compound, a basic compound, a rust preventive, and a surfactant.
  • plasticizer, sensitizer, heterocyclic compound and alkoxysilane compound include those described in paragraphs 0097 to 0119 of WO2018 / 179640.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer preferably further contains a basic compound.
  • a basic compound any of the basic compounds used in the chemically amplified resist can be selected and used. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0207 of JP 2011-221494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • examples of the aliphatic amine include di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, dicyclohexylamine, dicyclohexylmethylamine and the like. Be done.
  • examples of aromatic amines include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine and the like.
  • heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinic acid amide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7 -For example, Undecen.
  • CMTU N-cyclohexyl-N '-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea
  • Commercial products of CMTU include those manufactured by Toyo Kasei Co., Ltd.
  • a benzotriazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the linearity of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • the benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it has a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
  • the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H -Benzotriazole, 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1'-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2'-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of basic compound or two or more types of basic compounds.
  • the content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. preferable.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • a surfactant any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic) or amphoteric surfactants can be used, but the preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
  • nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. ..
  • KP manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Polyflow manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • F-top manufactured by JEMCO
  • Megafac manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.
  • Florard Suditomo 3M Co., Ltd.
  • Asahi Glass Surflon (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.)
  • PolyFox manufactured by OMNOVA
  • SH-8400 manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.
  • the surfactant for example, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used.
  • a commercially available product of the surfactant for example, Megafac F-552 or F-554 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be used.
  • the surfactants described in Paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and Paragraph 0060 to Paragraph 0071 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-237362 can be used.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of surfactant alone, or may contain two or more types of surfactant.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, and 0.01% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, it is from 3% by mass to 3% by mass.
  • additives metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid proliferating agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, colorants, thermal radical polymerization.
  • Known additives such as an initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a cross-linking agent, and an organic or inorganic suspending agent can be further added. Preferred embodiments of these components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the transfer material according to the present disclosure may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent may remain.
  • the content of the solvent in the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, and 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. More preferably.
  • the average thickness of the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m. When the average thickness of the positive photosensitive resin layer is 20 ⁇ m or less, the pattern resolution is more excellent, and when it is 0.5 ⁇ m or more, it is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
  • the average thickness of the positive photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m to 15 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may be formed by adjusting, coating and drying a photosensitive resin composition containing components necessary for forming the positive photosensitive resin layer and a solvent. it can. Specifically, each component and a solvent are mixed at an arbitrary ratio and in an arbitrary method, and dissolved by stirring to prepare a photosensitive resin composition for forming a positive photosensitive resin layer. . For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solutions at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above may be filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m to 30 ⁇ m.
  • the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can be formed by applying the photosensitive resin composition on a temporary support or a cover film and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and it can be coated by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating and the like. Further, the photosensitive resin layer can be formed on the temporary support or the cover film on which other layers described below are formed.
  • the photosensitive resin composition preferably contains a component contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer and a solvent.
  • a photosensitive resin layer can be preferably formed by incorporating a solvent into each component to adjust the viscosity, and applying and drying.
  • solvent examples include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether, propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether.
  • the solvent preferably contains a solvent having a vapor pressure at 20 ° C. of 1 kPa or more and 16 kPa or less, or a mixture thereof.
  • Solvents having a vapor pressure at 20 ° C. of 1 kPa or more and 16 kPa or less include ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl acetate, tert-butyl acetate, cyclopentyl methyl ether, diisopropyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl n.
  • -Butyl ketone methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methyl n-propyl ketone, methyl isopropyl ketone, toluene, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA), propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME), cyclohexanone, 1,2-propanediol diacetate, Preferable examples include 1,3-butanediol diacetate, 1,6-hexanediol diacetate, triacetin, dipropylene glycol-n-butyl ether, and diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate.
  • the solvent that can be used in the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two.
  • the content of the solvent at the time of applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. It is more preferably from about 900 parts by mass.
  • the transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off.
  • the temporary support used in the present disclosure may have light transmittance from the viewpoint of exposing the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer through the temporary support when the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer are subjected to pattern exposure.
  • Having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is from the viewpoint of improving the exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable.
  • the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film and the like. Of these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
  • the average thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 10 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support depends on the material, from the viewpoint of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding with a circuit wiring forming substrate, and light transmission required in the first exposure step. Just select it.
  • the transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably has a cover film on the surface of the transfer material opposite to the surface on which the temporary support is provided.
  • the cover film include a resin film and paper, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility.
  • the resin film include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film and polycarbonate film. Among them, polyethylene film, polypropylene film and polyethylene terephthalate film are preferable.
  • the average thickness of the cover film is not particularly limited, and for example, one having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m to 2 mm is preferable.
  • the transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than those described above (hereinafter, also referred to as “other layer”).
  • other layers include a contrast enhancement layer and a thermoplastic resin layer.
  • a preferred embodiment of the contrast enhancement layer is paragraph 0134 of International Publication No. 2018/179640
  • a preferred embodiment of the thermoplastic resin layer is paragraph 0189 to paragraph 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643
  • further preferred are other layers.
  • FIG. 1 an example of a layer configuration of a transfer material according to the present disclosure is schematically illustrated.
  • a temporary support 10 an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a resin pattern using the transfer material according to the present disclosure. However, it is photosensitive to the temporary support in the transfer material according to the present disclosure. Of the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer to the substrate for bonding (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “bonding step”) and pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, “exposure step”). ”) And a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as” developing step ").
  • the substrate in the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on its surface.
  • the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a circuit wiring using the transfer material according to the present disclosure, but is not limited to the temporary support in the transfer material according to the present disclosure.
  • the substrate in the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having the conductive layer on its surface.
  • a method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, and a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure include a method of forming the temporary support after the step of bonding to the substrate and before the step of forming the pattern. It is preferable to include a step of peeling.
  • the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer is of a positive type, which leaves as an image the portion not irradiated with actinic rays.
  • the solubility of the exposed areas is increased by using, for example, a photosensitizer which generates acid upon irradiation with the active rays. If none of the exposed parts are cured and the obtained pattern shape is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by exposing the entire surface.
  • the technique of exposing the remaining photosensitive resin layer again to form a different pattern can be realized only by the positive type photosensitive resin layer, the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or the present disclosure.
  • a mode in which the exposure is performed twice or more is preferably mentioned.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a mode in which four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step are set as one set and repeated a plurality of times.
  • the exposure step is further performed on the pattern.
  • a preferred mode is one in which the developing step and the etching step are subsequently performed.
  • the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when etching the conductive layer.
  • the method for press-bonding the substrate and the transfer material is not particularly limited, and known transfer methods and laminating methods can be used. Specifically, for example, the outermost layer side having the photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material is overlaid on a substrate, and pressure is applied by a roll, or pressure and heat are applied. It is preferably carried out.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of improving productivity can be used.
  • the pressure and temperature of the bonding step in the bonding step are not particularly limited, depending on the material of the surface of the substrate to be bonded, for example, the material of the conductive layer, the material of the outermost layer, the transport speed, and the pressure bonding machine to be used. It can be set appropriately.
  • the transfer material has a cover film
  • the cover film may be removed and then pressure-bonded.
  • the base material is a resin film
  • roll-to-roll pressure bonding may be performed.
  • the substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of a base material. Wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer.
  • a film base material such as polyethylene terephthalate is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals.
  • the substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate containing copper from the viewpoint of exerting the effect in the present disclosure more.
  • the conductive layer is preferably a layer containing copper.
  • the substrate is preferably a substrate in which a plurality of conductive layers are laminated on a support.
  • the support is preferably a glass base material or a film base material, and more preferably a film base material.
  • the support is a sheet-shaped resin composition.
  • the support is preferably transparent.
  • the refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the support may be composed of a translucent base material such as a glass base material, and a tempered glass typified by Gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Incorporated can be used.
  • the materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
  • a film base material is used as the base material, it is more preferable to use a base material having no optical distortion and a base material having high transparency, and specific materials include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose and cycloolefin polymer.
  • the conductive layer may be any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • Examples of the material of the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
  • Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 .
  • Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr and Mo.
  • At least one conductive layer of the plurality of conductive layers contains a metal oxide.
  • the conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition part used in the capacitive touch panel or a wiring of the peripheral extraction part.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step (exposure step) of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer after the attaching step.
  • the exposure step it is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer is irradiated with an actinic ray through a mask having a predetermined pattern.
  • the photo-acid generator decomposes to generate an acid.
  • the acid-decomposable group contained in the photosensitive resin layer is hydrolyzed to generate an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited.
  • the electrode pattern and the lead-out wiring are preferably 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • the exposure in the exposure step may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like, but exposure through a mask for exposure is preferable.
  • the method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of bringing the transfer material into contact with an exposure mask between the bonding step and the exposure step. It is preferable. In the above aspect, the resolution of the obtained pattern is more excellent.
  • Examples of the actinic rays include visible rays, ultraviolet rays, and electron rays. Visible rays or ultraviolet rays are preferable, and ultraviolet rays are particularly preferable.
  • an exposure light source for actinic rays a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light-emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator, etc. can be used, and g-line (436 nm), i-line (365 nm) , Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and 450 nm or less such as h-line (405 nm) can be preferably used.
  • Irradiation light can be adjusted through a spectral filter such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a bandpass filter, if necessary.
  • a spectral filter such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a bandpass filter
  • various types of exposure devices such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, and a laser exposure can be used.
  • Exposure dose depending on the photosensitive resin layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 100mJ / cm 2 .
  • PEB Post Exposure Bake
  • the pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
  • a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern (developing step) It is preferable to include
  • the transfer material has an intermediate layer
  • the developing step the exposed intermediate layer is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin layer.
  • the developing step the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may be removed in a form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developing solution.
  • Development of the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the developing step can be performed using a developer.
  • the developer is not particularly limited as long as it can remove the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer, and a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used.
  • the developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type developing behavior.
  • an alkaline aqueous solution is preferable, and for example, an alkaline aqueous solution containing a compound having pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is more preferable.
  • the developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant and the like. Examples of the developer preferably used in the present disclosure include the developers described in paragraph 0194 of WO 2015/093271.
  • the developing system is not particularly limited, and may be paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development or the like.
  • shower development the exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developing solution onto the photosensitive resin layer after exposure with a shower. Further, after development, it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like.
  • the liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C to 40 ° C. Further, the longer the time from exposure to development is, the more the effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape in the present disclosure is exhibited.
  • Development may be carried out immediately after exposure, but the time from exposure to development is preferably 0.5 hours or more, more preferably 1 hour or more, still more preferably 6 hours or more, after which the development is carried out.
  • the effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape according to the present disclosure is more exerted.
  • the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure such as a step of washing with water or the like after development, a step of drying the substrate having the obtained pattern, etc. May be included.
  • the post-baking heating is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, more preferably 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferably performed in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and particularly preferably in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes. Post bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • the transport speed of the support at each step in the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, but 0.5 m / It is preferably from min to 10 m / min, and more preferably from 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min except during exposure.
  • a method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure peels the temporary support after a step of bonding to the substrate and before a step of forming the pattern. It is preferable to include a step (temporary support peeling step).
  • the method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure uses the above transfer material, and therefore the temporary support is peeled off after the transfer material is bonded and at any timing before development. However, since the adhesiveness to the photosensitive resin layer is excellent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defective factors such as partial peeling, and it is possible to perform good pattern formation.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, from the viewpoint of pattern formability and resolution, after the step of bonding to the substrate, and the photosensitive resin layer It is more preferable to include a step of peeling the temporary support before the step of pattern exposure. Further, in the above aspect, when the mask is brought into contact with the substrate for pattern exposure, the photosensitive resin layer and the mask do not come into direct contact with each other, and therefore the pattern formability and the resolution are superior.
  • the method of peeling the temporary support in the peeling step is not particularly limited and may be a known method.
  • the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of peeling the cover film of the transfer material (“cover film”). It may be referred to as a "peeling step").
  • peeling step The method of peeling off the cover film is not limited, and a known method can be applied.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not arranged.
  • the etching step the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer in the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
  • etching can be applied by a known method such as the method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A, a method by dry etching such as a known plasma etching, or the like.
  • a known method such as the method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A
  • a method by dry etching such as a known plasma etching, or the like.
  • a generally used wet etching method of immersing in an etching solution can be mentioned.
  • an acidic type or alkaline type etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the object of etching.
  • the acidic type etching solution includes hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, or an aqueous solution containing only an acidic component such as phosphoric acid, an acidic component and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or permanganese. Examples include mixed aqueous solutions of salts such as potassium acid.
  • the acidic component a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
  • an aqueous solution containing only an alkali component such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, or a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an alkali component and potassium permanganate.
  • alkali component such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, or a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an alkali component and potassium permanganate.
  • Examples include mixed aqueous solutions of salts such as.
  • the alkaline component a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkaline components may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 45 ° C or lower.
  • the pattern used as the etching mask preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in the temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the pattern is prevented from peeling during the etching process, and the portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
  • a step of cleaning the etched substrate (washing step) and a step of drying the etched substrate (drying step) are performed as necessary.
  • the cleaning step include cleaning the substrate with pure water at room temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
  • air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted to perform the drying.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes a step of removing the photosensitive resin layer with a release solution (etching resist removing step) after the etching step. After the completion of the etching step, the patterned photosensitive resin layer remains. If the photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining photosensitive resin layer may be removed.
  • a method of peeling using a peeling solution for example, a substrate having the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer or the like in the peeling solution is stirred for 5 minutes at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. Examples include a method of soaking for about 30 minutes.
  • an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or A stripping solution dissolved in these mixed solutions can be used.
  • a stripping solution may be used and stripping may be performed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
  • the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step may be repeated twice or more as necessary.
  • the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be preferably used in the present disclosure.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of exposing the entire surface of the positive type photosensitive resin layer after the etching step. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "entire surface exposure step”.) And a step of removing the positively exposed photosensitive resin layer that has been entirely exposed.
  • the etching mask removing solution when used for a long time, the etching mask removing property may gradually decrease.
  • a circuit wiring is manufactured by repeatedly applying the circuit wiring manufacturing method to a substrate having a base material and a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer that are different in constituent materials from each other. You can also The step of removing the positive-type photosensitive resin layer exposed on the entire surface can be performed by the same method as the above-mentioned etching resist removing step.
  • the light source used for the exposure in the whole surface exposure process is not particularly limited, and a known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source containing light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
  • the exposure amount in the overall exposure step is preferably 5mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 1,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ⁇ 800mJ / cm 2, 100mJ / Particularly preferably, it is cm 2 to 500 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the exposure amount in the whole surface exposure process is preferably equal to or more than the exposure amount in the above exposure process, and more preferably more than the exposure amount in the above exposure process.
  • a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of heating the above-described whole-surface-exposed positive photosensitive resin layer during the whole-surface exposure step, after the exposure step, or both, and before a removing step described later. (Hereinafter, it may be called a "heating process.") By including the heating step, the reaction rate of the photo-acid generator and the reaction rate of the generated acid and the positive photosensitive resin can be further improved, and as a result, the removal performance is improved.
  • the method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include other arbitrary steps. For example, the following steps may be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to these steps.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method can include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, part or all of the surface of the conductive layer on the substrate. ..
  • the treatment for lowering the visible light reflectance include oxidation treatment.
  • the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening by oxidizing copper to copper oxide.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance see paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP-A-2014-150118 and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP-A-2013-206315. There is a description and the content of this publication is incorporated herein.
  • a method of manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an insulating film on the substrate, for example, the formed wiring (etched conductive layer), and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. It is also preferable to include.
  • the step of forming the insulating film is not particularly limited, and a known method of forming a permanent film can be used.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
  • a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by the same method as described above, or may be separately etched by a known method.
  • the substrate having circuit wiring obtained by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may have wiring of only one layer or wiring of two or more layers on the substrate.
  • the substrate may have a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and circuits may be sequentially or simultaneously formed on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the substrate.
  • a wiring in which a first conductive pattern (first wiring) is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern (second wiring) is formed on the other surface, preferably a touch panel wiring can be formed.
  • the resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is preferably performed by a roll-to-roll method.
  • the roll-to-roll method uses a substrate that can be wound and unwound as a substrate, and unwinds the substrate or a structure including the substrate before any step included in the method for manufacturing circuit wiring ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "winding step"), and a step of winding a structure including a base material or a substrate after any one of the steps (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "winding step").
  • the unwinding method in the unwinding step and the winding method in the winding step are not particularly limited, and known methods may be used in the manufacturing method to which the roll-to-roll method is applied.
  • the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • a substrate having circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a substrate having circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the application of the substrate having the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not limited, but it is preferably a circuit wiring board for a touch panel, for example.
  • An input device is an example of a device including circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the input device according to the present disclosure may be any input device that has at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel, and more preferably a capacitive touch panel. preferable.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure.
  • the display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
  • the method for manufacturing a touch panel according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for manufacturing a touch panel using the transfer material according to the present disclosure, but a positive photosensitive resin of the transfer material with respect to the temporary support is used.
  • a step of laminating the outermost layer on the side having a layer to a substrate having a conductive layer (hereinafter, also referred to as “laminating step"), and the positive photosensitive resin of the transfer material after the laminating step
  • a step of pattern-exposing the layer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “exposure step”), and a step of developing the positive photosensitive resin layer after the step of pattern-exposing to form a resin pattern (hereinafter, "development” It may be referred to as “process”) and a process of etching the substrate in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged (hereinafter, may be referred to as “etching process”) in this order.
  • the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of peeling the temporary support (temporary support peeling step) after the bonding step and before the developing step.
  • the touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include a step of peeling the cover film of the transfer material (cover film peeling step) before the bonding step.
  • the temporary support peeling step, the laminating step, the exposing step, the developing step, the etching step, and the cover film peeling step specific aspects of each step, the above-mentioned "circuit wiring As described in the section of “Production method”, the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • a touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel including at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
  • the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably has at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure may be any known method such as a resistance film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method. Of these, the capacitance method is preferable.
  • the touch panel type a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of Japanese Patent Publication No.
  • Polymer A-3 (PHS-EVE having the following structure, weight average molecular weight: 20,000) was obtained according to the method described in paragraph 0232 of JP-A-2014-85643.
  • the numerical value of each structural unit represents the content (mass%) of each structural unit.
  • Photosensitive resin composition 1 was obtained by blending with the following composition and filtering with a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m.
  • composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer Each component was mixed in the following composition to prepare a composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer.
  • composition of Composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer -Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass-Methanol: 61.2 parts by mass-Hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC, HPC-SSL manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 5.0 parts by mass-Megafuck F-569 (F-569) Manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd., including fluorine atom-containing nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a molecular weight of 700 or more.): 0.1 part by mass
  • F-410 Megafac F-410, manufactured by DIC Corporation, does not include anionic surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a carboxy group and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • F-444 Megafac F-444, manufactured by DIC Corporation, does not include a nonionic surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and an alkyleneoxy group and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • F-477 Megafac F-477, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • F-510 Megafac F-510, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including an anionic surfactant (oligomer) having a perfluoroalkyl group and a phosphoric acid group, having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • F-553 Includes Megafac F-553, manufactured by DIC Corporation, a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom, and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • F-556 Megafac F-556, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a fluorine atom-containing nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • F-559 Megafac F-556, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • R-94 Megafac R-94, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  • Example 1 ⁇ Preparation of transfer material> Onto a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (temporary support, thickness: 25 ⁇ m), the above composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 1.6 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle. After the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was dried, the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was further applied thereon by an amount of 0.4 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle. After drying the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • Example 2 to 14 Transfer materials of Examples 2 to 14 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was changed to the composition 2 for forming an intermediate layer to the composition 14 for forming an intermediate layer.
  • Example 15 The composition 4 for forming an intermediate layer was applied onto a PET film (temporary support, thickness: 25 ⁇ m) using a slit-shaped nozzle in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 1.6 ⁇ m. After the composition 4 for forming an intermediate layer was dried, the composition 15 for forming an intermediate layer was further applied thereon by an amount of 0.4 ⁇ m using a slit nozzle. After drying the composition 15 for forming the intermediate layer, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m. Then, it was dried with warm air of 100 ° C., and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar Co., Ltd.) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a transfer material of Example 15.
  • OSM-N polyethylene film
  • Example 16 A transfer material of Example 16 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the dry film thickness of the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied in an amount of 5.0 ⁇ m.
  • Example 17 or Example 18 A transfer material of Example 17 or Example 18 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive resin composition 1 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition 2 or the photosensitive resin composition 3.
  • Photosensitive resin compositions 2 and 3 were obtained by blending with the following composition and filtering with a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore size of 0.2 ⁇ m.
  • Example 19 ⁇ Preparation of transfer material>
  • the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was applied onto PET using a slit-shaped nozzle in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 1.6 ⁇ m.
  • the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 ⁇ m. Then, it was dried with warm air of 100 ° C., and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar Co., Ltd.) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a transfer material of Example 19.
  • OSM-N polyethylene film
  • Comparative Example 1 A transfer material of Comparative Example 1 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was changed to the composition 16 for forming an intermediate layer.
  • ⁇ Strip evaluation> The cover film was peeled off from the produced transfer material, the light of a fluorescent lamp was applied to the transfer material, and the appearance of the streaks was evaluated visually at an angle of 45 °.
  • the “streaks” in the transfer material according to the present disclosure are stripes on the surface to be transferred in the transfer material (transfer surface, in the above-described Examples and Comparative Examples, the surface of the photosensitive resin layer from which the cover film has been peeled off). Indicates a failure that causes unevenness. In many cases, the streaks are generated in parallel with the conveying direction when the transfer material is manufactured.
  • a roll-shaped substrate (PET substrate with a copper layer) was prepared by forming a copper layer on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 200 ⁇ m with a thickness of 250 nm by a sputtering method.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • the cover film was peeled from the produced transfer material, and laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under laminating conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminating speed) of 4.0 m / min.
  • a line-and-space pattern (Duty ratio 1: 1) mask having a line width of 6 ⁇ m was brought into contact with a temporary support, exposed by an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, left at 23 ° C. for 3 hours, and then developed. The development was carried out for 40 seconds by shower development using a 1.0% by mass sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 28 ° C.
  • a line-and-space pattern having a line width of 6 ⁇ m was formed by the above method, and the exposure amount at which the ratio of the line width to the space width was 1: 1 was determined.
  • a line-and-space pattern having a line width of 6 ⁇ m at the exposure amount was formed by the above method, and etching was performed by immersing in a copper etching solution (Cu-02, manufactured by Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd.) at 25 ° C. for 5 minutes to form a square shape.
  • the copper pattern wiring of was produced.
  • the obtained copper pattern wiring was observed with an optical microscope.
  • the observation area of 0.26 mm ⁇ 0.20 mm in the copper pattern wiring was taken as one shot, and the number of wiring defects of the copper pattern wiring was measured in a total of 5 shots at the central portion of the copper pattern wiring and the four corners of the square shape.
  • the following evaluation was performed by the maximum number of the total number of wiring defects of disconnection (open) of wiring and coupling (short) of wiring in one shot. It is preferably A or B.
  • B The number of defects in the copper pattern is 1 or more and 4 or less.
  • C The number of defects in the copper pattern is 5 or more.
  • ⁇ Adhesion evaluation> The cover film was peeled off from the produced transfer material, and laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer under the laminating conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminating speed) of 4.0 m / min.
  • a sample was prepared by cutting into 4.5 cm ⁇ 10 cm, and the PET substrate side with the copper layer was fixed on a sample table.
  • a tensile compression tester SV-55 manufactured by Imada Seisakusho Co., Ltd.
  • Adhesion exceeds 0.098 N / cm.
  • B The adhesion is 0.069 N / cm to 0.098 N / cm.
  • C Adhesion is less than 0.069 N / cm.
  • the transfer materials of Examples 1 to 19 have less streaks on the surface to be transferred than the transfer materials of Comparative Example 1. Further, from Table 2 above, the transfer materials of Examples 1 to 19 are excellent in adhesion in transfer, and there are few wiring defects when the transfer material is used as an etching resist.
  • Example 101 On a PET substrate having a thickness of 100 ⁇ m, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method. And used as a circuit forming substrate.
  • the transfer material obtained in Example 1 was attached to the substrate on the copper layer (laminating roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate.
  • a photomask provided with a pattern hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG.
  • the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light-shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows a frame for alignment alignment. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, and development and washing were carried out to obtain pattern A. Then, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in the pattern A was obtained.
  • Cu-02 copper etching solution
  • ITO-02 ITO etching solution
  • pattern B a photomask provided with openings of the pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern B”), and development and washing were performed.
  • the gray part G is a light-shielding part
  • the dotted line part DL is a virtual frame for alignment.
  • the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • Example 102 On a PET substrate having a thickness of 100 ⁇ m, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method. And used as a circuit formation substrate.
  • the transfer material obtained in Example 1 was attached to the substrate on the copper layer (laminating roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate.
  • the obtained laminated body was pattern-exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, and development and washing were carried out to obtain pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • a substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in the pattern A was obtained.
  • PET (A) was laminated as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with openings for the pattern B in alignment with each other, and the PET (A) was peeled off, followed by development and washing with water.
  • the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a peeling solution KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • Example 103 On a 100 ⁇ m-thick cycloolefin polymer (COP) substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method. To form a substrate for forming a conductive pattern.
  • the transfer material obtained in Example 1 was attached to the substrate on the copper layer (laminating roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate.
  • the obtained laminated body was pattern-exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A.
  • the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) By peeling using (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), a substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in the pattern A was obtained.
  • Example 1 the transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded onto the remaining resist (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.).
  • pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening for the pattern B, and the temporary support of the transfer material was peeled off, followed by development and washing with water.
  • the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern. ..
  • KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.
  • 10 temporary support
  • 12 intermediate layer
  • 14 photosensitive resin layer
  • 16 cover film
  • 100 transfer material
  • SL solid line part
  • G gray part
  • DL dotted line part

Abstract

The invention provides a transfer material having a temporary support, an intermediate layer containing a water-soluble resin, and a positive type photosensitive resin layer, in this order, wherein the intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom; the invention also provides a resin pattern production method, a circuit wiring production method, and a touch panel production method, which use the transfer material.

Description

転写材料、樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法Transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
 本開示は、転写材料、樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a transfer material, a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
 静電容量型入力装置などのタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置など)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線などの導電層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写材料を用いて任意の基板上に設けた感光性樹脂組成物の層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
2. Description of the Related Art In a display device (organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.) equipped with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device, an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition part, a wiring of a peripheral wiring part and an extraction wiring part A conductive layer pattern such as is provided inside the touch panel.
In general, a patterned layer is formed by a small number of steps for obtaining a required pattern shape. Therefore, a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on an arbitrary substrate using a photosensitive transfer material. On the other hand, a method of developing after exposing through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
 また、従来の感光性樹脂組成物又は転写材料としては、特許文献1又は2に記載されたものが知られている。
 特許文献1には、仮支持体と、中間層と、感光性樹脂組成物層とをこの順で有し、上記感光性樹脂組成物層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体と、光酸発生剤とを含有し、上記中間層が、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性であり、かつフェノール性水酸基又は主鎖に直結していないアルコール性水酸基を有する構成単位を含む樹脂Cを含有する感光性転写材料が記載されている。
Further, as the conventional photosensitive resin composition or transfer material, those described in Patent Document 1 or 2 are known.
Patent Document 1 has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a photosensitive resin composition layer in this order, and the photosensitive resin composition layer has an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. Containing a polymer having a structural unit, and a photoacid generator, the intermediate layer is water-soluble or alkali-soluble, and a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group or an alcoholic hydroxyl group not directly linked to the main chain Photosensitive transfer materials containing Resin C containing are described.
 特許文献2には、仮支持体の上に少なくとも1つの転写層を有し、仮支持体を剥離する際の剥離力の最大値が180°ピール法において0.98~5.39mN/cmである転写用積層材料が記載されている。 In Patent Document 2, at least one transfer layer is provided on a temporary support, and the maximum peeling force when peeling the temporary support is 0.98 to 5.39 mN / cm in a 180 ° peel method. Certain transfer laminates are described.
  特許文献1:国際公開第2018/179640号
  特許文献2:特開2009-73022号公報
Patent Document 1: International Publication No. 2018/179640 Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-73022
 本発明の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、転写される面におけるスジが少ない転写材料を提供することである。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態が解決しようとする課題は、上記転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することである。
The problem to be solved by one embodiment of the present invention is to provide a transfer material having less streaks on the surface to be transferred.
Further, another problem to be solved by another embodiment of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a resin pattern using the above transfer material, a method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and a method for manufacturing a touch panel.
 上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 仮支持体と、水溶性樹脂を含む中間層と、ポジ型感光性樹脂層と、をこの順に有し、上記中間層が、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤を含む転写材料。
<2> 上記界面活性剤が、分子量700以上の化合物を含む<1>に記載の転写材料。
<3> 上記界面活性剤の25℃の水100gに対する溶解度が、1g以上である<1>又は<2>に記載の転写材料。
<4> 上記界面活性剤の含有量が、上記中間層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~1.0質量%である<1>~<3>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料。
<5> 上記界面活性剤が、フルオロアルキル基とアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤である<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料。
<6> 上記界面活性剤が、パーフルオロアルキル基とポリアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤である<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料。
<7> 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層における重合体成分の含有量が、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、75質量%以上である<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料。
<8> 上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、及び、光酸発生剤を含む<1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料。
<9> 上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位が、下記式A1~式A3のいずれかにより表される構成単位である<8>に記載の転写材料。
Means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> A transfer material having a temporary support, an intermediate layer containing a water-soluble resin, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, and the intermediate layer containing a surfactant having a fluorine atom.
<2> The transfer material according to <1>, wherein the surfactant contains a compound having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
<3> The transfer material according to <1> or <2>, wherein the surfactant has a solubility of 1 g or more in 100 g of water at 25 ° C.
<4> The content of the surfactant according to any one of <1> to <3>, which is 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer. Transfer material.
<5> The transfer material according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the surfactant is a surfactant having a fluoroalkyl group and an alkyleneoxy group.
<6> The transfer material according to any one of <1> to <5>, wherein the surfactant is a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy group.
<7> Any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the content of the polymer component in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 75% by mass or more based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. The transfer material described in 1.
<8> Any one of <1> to <7>, in which the positive photosensitive resin layer contains a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photo-acid generator. The transfer material according to one.
<9> The transfer material according to <8>, wherein the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas A1 to A3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式A1中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR11及びR12のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R13はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R14は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、R15は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式A2中、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR21及びR22のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R23はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R21又はR22と、R23とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R24はそれぞれ独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アリールカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基又はシクロアルキル基を表し、mは0~3の整数を表す。
 式A3中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。
In formula A1, R 11 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 14 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 1 is a single bond or a divalent linking group. R 15 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
In formula A2, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, and R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 24 is independently a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, It represents an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
In formula A3, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
<10> <1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料における上記仮支持体に対してポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む樹脂パターンの製造方法。
<11> <1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む回路配線の製造方法。
<12> <1>~<9>のいずれか1つに記載の転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含むタッチパネルの製造方法。
<10> A step of bringing the outermost layer on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer into contact with the substrate and adhering to the temporary support in the transfer material according to any one of <1> to <9>. A method of manufacturing a resin pattern, comprising: a step of pattern-exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer, and a step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, in this order.
<11> The outermost layer on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to any one of <1> to <9> is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer. And a step of patterning the positive photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and the resin pattern are arranged. And a step of etching the conductive layer in a non-existing region in this order.
<12> The outermost layer on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to any one of <1> to <9> is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer. And a step of patterning the positive photosensitive resin layer, a step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and the resin pattern are arranged. And a step of etching the conductive layer in a non-existing region in this order.
 本発明の一実施形態によれば、転写される面におけるスジが少ない転写材料を提供することができる。
 また、本発明の他の一実施形態によれば、上記転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及び、タッチパネルの製造方法を提供することができる。
According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a transfer material having few streaks on the surface to be transferred.
Further, according to another embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a resin pattern, a method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and a method for manufacturing a touch panel, which use the transfer material.
本開示に係る転写材料の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。It is a schematic diagram showing an example of layer composition of a transfer material concerning this indication. パターンAを示す概略図である。It is a schematic diagram showing pattern A. パターンBを示す概略図である。It is a schematic diagram showing pattern B.
 以下、本開示の内容について説明する。なお、添付の図面を参照しながら説明するが、符号は省略する場合がある。
 また、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」はアクリル及びメタクリルの双方、又は、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリレート」はアクリレート及びメタクリレートの双方、又は、いずれかを表す。
 更に、本明細書において組成物中の各成分の量は、組成物中に各成分に該当する物質が複数存在する場合、特に断らない限り、組成物中に存在する該当する複数の物質の合計量を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、一般的に、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線(活性エネルギー線)が挙げられる。
 また、本明細書における化学構造式は、水素原子を省略した簡略構造式で記載する場合もある。
 本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
 また、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
 また、本開示における重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶媒THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。
The contents of the present disclosure will be described below. The description will be made with reference to the accompanying drawings, but the reference numerals may be omitted.
Further, in the present specification, the numerical range represented by “to” means a range including the numerical values before and after “to” as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
Moreover, in this specification, "(meth) acryl" represents both acryl and methacryl, or either, and "(meth) acrylate" represents both an acrylate and a methacrylate.
Further, in the present specification, the amount of each component in the composition is the sum of the corresponding plurality of substances present in the composition, unless a plurality of substances corresponding to each component are present in the composition. Means quantity.
In the present specification, the term “process” is included not only in an independent process but also in the case where the intended purpose of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes.
In the description of the group (atom group) in the present specification, the notation in which substitution and non-substitution are not included includes not only those having no substituent but also those having a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
Unless otherwise specified, the term “exposure” as used herein includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams. In addition, as the light used for the exposure, generally, the bright line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), active rays (active energy rays) such as X-rays and electron rays are used. Can be mentioned.
In addition, the chemical structural formula in the present specification may be described as a simplified structural formula in which a hydrogen atom is omitted.
In the present disclosure, “mass%” and “weight%” have the same meaning, and “mass part” and “weight part” have the same meaning.
Further, in the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferable aspects is a more preferable aspect.
In addition, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure use columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (both manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) unless otherwise specified. The gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer was used to detect the solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) with a differential refractometer, and the molecular weight was calculated using polystyrene as a standard substance.
(転写材料)
 本開示に係る転写材料(「感光性転写材料」ともいう。)は、仮支持体と、水溶性樹脂を含む中間層と、ポジ型感光性樹脂層(以下、単に「感光性樹脂層」ともいう。)と、をこの順に有し、上記中間層が、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤を含む。
 また、本開示に係る転写材料は、ポジ型感光性転写材料である。
(Transfer material)
The transfer material (also referred to as “photosensitive transfer material”) according to the present disclosure includes a temporary support, an intermediate layer containing a water-soluble resin, and a positive photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “photosensitive resin layer”). And) in this order, and the intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom.
The transfer material according to the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive transfer material.
 中間層、及び、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を製造する場合、ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、樹脂を主成分とする硬い層であり、流動性が小さいため、ポジ型感光性樹脂層形成時において、中間層の形状の影響を受け、中間層形成時に生じるスジ等の形状欠陥が、ポジ型感光性樹脂層に同様の形状欠陥を反映し、また、更に、ポジ型感光性樹脂層上の他の層を更に形成した場合は、その層にまで同様の形状欠陥を反映される場合があり、このように、中間層、及び、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する転写材料において、転写される面においてスジが生じてしまうという問題があることを、本発明者らは見出した。
 一方、特許文献2等に記載されているネガ型感光性樹脂層は、重合性化合物を含む層であり、流動性が高いため、ネガ型感光性樹脂層形成時に中間層形成時に生じたスジ等の形状欠陥の影響が反映されることはなく、ネガ型感光性樹脂層が平坦化されるため、上記のように、転写される面にスジが発生するという課題は発生しない。
 よって、転写される面におけるスジが少なくするという課題は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層特有の課題である。
 なお、上記「転写される面」を「転写面」ともいい、例えば、仮支持体と、中間層と、ポジ型感光性樹脂層と、をこの順に有する転写材料であれば、上記転写材料のポジ型感光性樹脂層側の表面である。
When manufacturing the intermediate layer and the positive type photosensitive resin layer, the positive type photosensitive resin layer is a hard layer containing a resin as a main component and has low fluidity. , Shape defects such as stripes which are influenced by the shape of the intermediate layer when the intermediate layer is formed reflect similar shape defects to the positive photosensitive resin layer, and further When the layer of No. 1 is further formed, similar shape defects may be reflected up to that layer. Thus, in the transfer material having the intermediate layer and the positive photosensitive resin layer, the surface to be transferred is The present inventors have found that there is a problem that streaks occur in the above.
On the other hand, the negative photosensitive resin layer described in Patent Document 2 and the like is a layer containing a polymerizable compound and has high fluidity, and thus streaks and the like generated during the formation of the intermediate layer during the formation of the negative photosensitive resin layer. The influence of the shape defect is not reflected, and the negative photosensitive resin layer is flattened, so that the problem of streaks on the transferred surface does not occur as described above.
Therefore, the problem of reducing streaks on the transferred surface is a problem peculiar to the positive photosensitive resin layer.
The “transfer surface” is also referred to as a “transfer surface”, and for example, if the transfer material has a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, This is the surface on the positive photosensitive resin layer side.
 本発明者らは鋭意検討を重ねた結果、上記構成の転写材料とすることにより、転写される面におけるスジが少ない転写材料が得られることを見出した。
 詳細な上記効果の発現機構は不明であるが、仮支持体、中間層、及び、ポジ型感光性樹脂層をこの順に有し、上記中間層がフッ素原子を有する界面活性剤を含むことにより、上記中間層の表面におけるスジの発生を抑制し、また、上記スジの発生に伴う上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の表面形状の悪化が抑制され、転写される面におけるスジが少ない転写材料が得られると推定される。
 また、上記スジの発生は、中間層形成時における中間層形成層組成物の対流、及び、中間層形成層組成物に含まれる溶剤の揮発ムラにより生じるものと推定される。
As a result of intensive studies, the inventors of the present invention have found that the transfer material having the above-mentioned structure can provide a transfer material having few streaks on the surface to be transferred.
Although the detailed mechanism of expressing the above effect is unknown, a temporary support, an intermediate layer, and a positive photosensitive resin layer in this order, the intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom, Generation of streaks on the surface of the intermediate layer is suppressed, deterioration of the surface shape of the positive photosensitive resin layer due to the generation of streaks is suppressed, and a transfer material having few streaks on the surface to be transferred is obtained. It is estimated to be.
It is presumed that the above-mentioned generation of streaks is caused by convection of the intermediate layer forming layer composition during the formation of the intermediate layer and uneven volatilization of the solvent contained in the intermediate layer forming layer composition.
 また、上述したように、ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、樹脂を主成分とする硬い層であり、流動性が小さいため、中間層に生じたスジの影響が転写面にまで反映されて、スジが生じる。上記スジの発生を、上記中間層がフッ素原子を有する界面活性剤を含むことにより、抑制できる。上記スジの発生が抑制されるため、転写時において、転写面における貼り合わせ部分に、上記スジの部分に気泡が入り込むことを抑制でき、転写面における密着性が優れ、また、エッチングレジストとして転写材料を使用した場合、上記スジ及び気泡に由来する樹脂パターン形状の欠陥、及び、それに伴うエッチングパターンである配線の断線や不要な結合及び接触(ショート)等の欠陥も少ない。
 よって、本開示に係る転写材料は、上記構成であることにより、転写における密着性にも優れ、また、エッチングレジストとして転写材料を使用した場合における配線欠陥も少ない。
In addition, as described above, the positive photosensitive resin layer is a hard layer containing a resin as a main component and has low fluidity, so that the influence of the stripes generated in the intermediate layer is reflected on the transfer surface, and Occurs. Generation of the streak can be suppressed by including the surfactant having a fluorine atom in the intermediate layer. Since the generation of the streaks is suppressed, at the time of transfer, at the bonded portion on the transfer surface, it is possible to suppress bubbles from entering the streaks, excellent adhesion on the transfer surface, and a transfer material as an etching resist. When the above is used, there are few defects in the resin pattern shape derived from the above-mentioned streaks and bubbles, and the accompanying defects such as disconnection of wiring which is an etching pattern and unnecessary coupling and contact (short).
Therefore, the transfer material according to the present disclosure has excellent adhesiveness in transfer due to the above-described configuration, and has few wiring defects when the transfer material is used as the etching resist.
 以下、本開示に係る転写材料について、詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the transfer material according to the present disclosure will be described in detail.
<中間層>
 本開示に係る転写材料は、中間層を有する。
 中間層は、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤、及び、水溶性樹脂を含み、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤、水溶性樹脂、及び、後述する色素を含むことが好ましい。
<Middle layer>
The transfer material according to the present disclosure has an intermediate layer.
The intermediate layer contains a fluorine atom-containing surfactant and a water-soluble resin, and preferably contains a fluorine atom-containing surfactant, a water-soluble resin, and a dye described below.
〔フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤〕
 中間層は、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤を含む。
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を有する基と親水性基とを有する化合物が挙げられる。
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する基を1つのみ有していても、2以上有していてもよい。
 また、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、親水性基を1つのみ有していても、2以上有していてもよい。
[Surfactant having a fluorine atom]
The intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom.
Examples of the surfactant having a fluorine atom include compounds having a group having a fluorine atom and a hydrophilic group.
The surfactant having a fluorine atom may have only one group having a fluorine atom or may have two or more groups.
The surfactant having a fluorine atom may have only one hydrophilic group or two or more hydrophilic groups.
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、スジの発生抑制の観点から、フッ素原子を有する基として、フルオロアルキル基又はフルオロアリール基を有することが好ましく、フルオロアルキル基を有することがより好ましく、パーフルオロアルキル基を有することが特に好ましい。
 また、上記パーフルオロアルキル基としては、スジの発生抑制の観点から、炭素数4以上のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが好ましく、炭素数4~18のパーフルオロアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数4~12のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが更に好ましく、炭素数4~6のパーフルオロアルキル基であることが特に好ましい。
From the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks, the surfactant having a fluorine atom preferably has a fluoroalkyl group or a fluoroaryl group as a group having a fluorine atom, more preferably a fluoroalkyl group, and a perfluoroalkyl group. It is particularly preferable to have a group.
From the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks, the perfluoroalkyl group is preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 18 carbon atoms, A perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 to 6 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、スジの発生抑制、及び、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、フッ素原子を有するイオン性界面活性剤、又は、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤であることが好ましく、フッ素原子を有するアニオン性界面活性剤、又は、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤であることがより好ましく、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤であることが特に好ましい。
 イオン性の親水性基としては、親水性、スジの発生抑制、及び、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、酸基であることが好ましく、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、ホスホン酸基、又は、リン酸基であることがより好ましく、リン酸基であることが特に好ましい。
 ノニオン性の親水性基としては、親水性、スジの発生抑制、及び、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、アルキレンオキシ基、又は、ヒドロキシ基であることが好ましく、アルキレンオキシ基がより好ましく、ポリアルキレンオキシ基が特に好ましい。
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、スジの発生抑制、及び、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、親水性基として、酸基、及び、アルキレンオキシ基よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1つの基を有することが好ましく、アルキレンオキシ基を有することがより好ましく、ポリアルキレンオキシ基を有することが特に好ましい。
 上記アルキレンオキシ基としては、エチレンオキシ基、又は、プロピレンオキシ基が好ましく挙げられる。
 また、上記ポリアルキレンオキシ基としては、ポリエチレンオキシ基、ポリプロピレンオキシ基、又は、1以上のエチレンオキシ基及び1以上のプロピレンオキシ基が結合してなる基が好ましく挙げられる。
The surfactant having a fluorine atom is an ionic surfactant having a fluorine atom or a nonionic surfactant having a fluorine atom, from the viewpoints of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface during transfer. Is more preferable, an anionic surfactant having a fluorine atom or a nonionic surfactant having a fluorine atom is more preferable, and a nonionic surfactant having a fluorine atom is particularly preferable.
The ionic hydrophilic group, hydrophilicity, suppression of streak generation, and from the viewpoint of adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer, preferably an acid group, a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, Alternatively, a phosphoric acid group is more preferable, and a phosphoric acid group is particularly preferable.
As the nonionic hydrophilic group, hydrophilicity, suppression of streak generation, and from the viewpoint of adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer, an alkyleneoxy group or a hydroxy group is preferable, and an alkyleneoxy group is More preferably, a polyalkyleneoxy group is particularly preferable.
The surfactant having a fluorine atom is at least selected from the group consisting of an acid group and an alkyleneoxy group as the hydrophilic group, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks, and the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer. It preferably has one group, more preferably has an alkyleneoxy group, and particularly preferably has a polyalkyleneoxy group.
The alkyleneoxy group is preferably an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group.
The polyalkyleneoxy group is preferably a polyethyleneoxy group, a polypropyleneoxy group, or a group formed by bonding one or more ethyleneoxy groups and one or more propyleneoxy groups.
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、スジの発生抑制、及び、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、フルオロアルキル基とアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤であることが好ましく、パーフルオロアルキル基とポリアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤であることがより好ましく、炭素数4以上のパーフルオロアルキル基とポリアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤であることが特に好ましい。 The surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferably a surfactant having a fluoroalkyl group and an alkyleneoxy group, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer, and perfluoro A surfactant having an alkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy group is more preferable, and a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms and a polyalkyleneoxy group is particularly preferable.
 中間層は、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤を、1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
 中間層におけるフッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、スジの発生抑制、及び、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、分子量500以上の化合物を含むことが好ましく、分子量700以上の化合物を含むことがより好ましく、分子量1,000以上10,000以下の化合物を含むことが特に好ましい。また、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤は、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、重量平均分子量(Mw)20,000以下の化合物であることが好ましく、重量平均分子量10,000以下の化合物であることがより好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain one type of surfactant having a fluorine atom, or two or more types thereof.
The surfactant having a fluorine atom in the intermediate layer preferably contains a compound having a molecular weight of 500 or more, and a compound having a molecular weight of 700 or more, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. Is more preferable, and it is particularly preferable to include a compound having a molecular weight of 1,000 or more and 10,000 or less. Further, the surfactant having a fluorine atom is preferably a compound having a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 20,000 or less, and a weight average molecular weight of 10,000 or less, from the viewpoint of adhesion on the transfer surface during transfer. More preferably, it is a compound.
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤の25℃の水100gに対する溶解度が、スジの発生抑制、及び、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤の析出抑制の観点から、0.5g以上であることが好ましく、1g以上であることがより好ましい。
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤の例としては、メガファック(DIC(株)製)の各シリーズを好ましく挙げることができる。
The solubility of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant in 100 g of water at 25 ° C. is preferably 0.5 g or more, from the viewpoint of suppressing streak generation and suppressing the precipitation of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant, 1 g or more Is more preferable.
As an example of the surfactant having a fluorine atom, each series of Megafac (manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be preferably mentioned.
 フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤の含有量は、スジの発生抑制、及び、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対して、0.05質量%~2.0質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~1.0質量%であることがより好ましく、0.2質量%~0.4質量%であることが特に好ましい。 The content of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant is from 0.05% by mass to 2% with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoints of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer. The content is preferably 0.0% by mass, more preferably 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.2% by mass to 0.4% by mass.
〔水溶性樹脂〕
 中間層は、水溶性樹脂を含む。
 水溶性樹脂としては、例えば、セルロース系樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリビニルピロリドン系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレンオキサイド系樹脂、ゼラチン、ビニルエーテル系樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、及び、これらの共重合体などの樹脂が挙げられる。中でも、セルロース系樹脂であることが好ましく、ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース及びヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロースよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の樹脂であることがより好ましい。
[Water-soluble resin]
The intermediate layer contains a water-soluble resin.
Examples of the water-soluble resin include cellulose resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinylpyrrolidone resins, acrylamide resins, polyethylene oxide resins, gelatin, vinyl ether resins, polyamide resins, and resins such as copolymers thereof. Is mentioned. Of these, a cellulose resin is preferable, and at least one resin selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl cellulose and hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose is more preferable.
 また、水溶性樹脂としては、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂が好ましく挙げられる。なお、本開示において、「水溶性」とは、22℃においてpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味し、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、22℃において炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。
 また、上記「水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性」とは、水溶性か、アルカリ可溶性のいずれかであっても、水溶性かつアルカリ可溶性であってもよい。
 また、水溶性樹脂は、22℃におけるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が、1g以上であることが好ましく、5g以上であることがより好ましい。
 上記水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性アクリル樹脂は、水溶性又はアルカリ可溶性の観点から、親水性基を有することが好ましく、親水性基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 上記親水性基としては、塩を形成してもよい酸基、ヒドロキシ基、ポリアルキレンオキシ基、アミド基、塩を形成してもよい塩基性基等が好ましく挙げられ、密着性の観点から、塩を形成してもよい酸基又はヒドロキシ基を少なくとも有することが好ましい。
As the water-soluble resin, a water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin is preferably mentioned. In the present disclosure, “water-soluble” means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more, and “alkali-soluble” means sodium carbonate at 22 ° C. It means that the solubility in 100 g of a 1 mass% aqueous solution is 0.1 g or more.
The term "water-soluble or alkali-soluble" may be either water-soluble or alkali-soluble, or water-soluble and alkali-soluble.
The solubility of the water-soluble resin in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is preferably 1 g or more, and more preferably 5 g or more.
From the viewpoint of water solubility or alkali solubility, the water-soluble or alkali-soluble acrylic resin preferably has a hydrophilic group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a hydrophilic group.
Examples of the hydrophilic group include an acid group which may form a salt, a hydroxy group, a polyalkyleneoxy group, an amide group, and a basic group which may form a salt, and the like, and from the viewpoint of adhesion, It is preferable to have at least an acid group or a hydroxy group that may form a salt.
 中間層は、水溶性樹脂を、1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
 水溶性樹脂の含有量は、得られるパターンの形状、転写時の上記転写面における密着性、及び、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対して、20質量%~100質量%であることが好ましく、50質量%~100質量%であることがより好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain one type of water-soluble resin or two or more types.
The content of the water-soluble resin, the shape of the obtained pattern, the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer, and from the viewpoint of the adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer, It is preferably 20% by mass to 100% by mass, and more preferably 50% by mass to 100% by mass.
〔色素〕
 上記中間層は、露光パターンの確認容易性の観点から、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する色素(単に「色素」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 色素が「酸、塩基又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する」とは、発色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより消色する態様、消色状態にある色素が酸、塩基又はラジカルにより発色する態様、及び、発色状態にある色素が他の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を指すものであってもよい。
 具体的には、色素は、露光により消色状態から変化して発色する化合物であってもよいし、露光により発色状態から変化して消色する化合物であってもよい。この場合、露光により酸、塩基又はラジカルが中間層内に導入されることにより、発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよく、酸、塩基又はラジカルが導入されることで系内の性状(例えばpH)が変化することで発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。また、露光を介さずに、酸、塩基又はラジカルが刺激として直接的に与えられて発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。
 中でも、色素は、露光により発色する化合物であっても、露光により消色する化合物であってもよいが、視認性の観点から、露光により消色する化合物であることが好ましく、光酸発生剤から発生する酸により消色する潜在性色素、すなわち、酸の発生によりpHが変化して消色するpH感受性色素であることがより好ましい。
[Dye]
From the viewpoint of easy confirmation of the exposure pattern, the intermediate layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, and a dye (simply referred to as “dye It is also referred to as ".".
Dyes "maximum absorption wavelength is changed by acid, base or radical" means that the dye in the colored state is decolored by acid, base or radical, the dye in the decolored state is colored by acid, base or radical. And the aspect in which the dye in the coloring state changes to the coloring state of another hue.
Specifically, the dye may be a compound that changes from the decolored state to a color upon exposure to light, or a compound that changes from the decolored state to a color upon exposure to light. In this case, a dye whose color development or decolorization state is changed by introducing an acid, a base or a radical into the intermediate layer by exposure may be used, and a property in the system by introducing an acid, a base or a radical ( For example, it may be a dye whose color-developed or decolored state changes when pH) changes. Further, it may be a dye in which an acid, a base, or a radical is directly given as a stimulus to directly change the state of color development or decolorization without exposure.
Among them, the dye may be a compound that develops color upon exposure to light or a compound that disappears upon exposure to light, but from the viewpoint of visibility, it is preferable that it is a compound that disappears upon exposure to light. It is more preferable to use a latent dye that is decolorized by the acid generated from the dye, that is, a pH-sensitive dye that is decolorized by changing the pH due to the generation of acid.
 pH感受性色素であることの確認は、以下の方法により行うことができる。
 色素0.1gを、エタノール及び水の混合溶液(エタノール/水=1/2(質量比))100mLに溶かし、0.1mol/L(1N)の塩酸水溶液を加えてpH=1に調整する。0.01mol/L(0.01N)の水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で滴定し、発色変化と発色変化が現れた際のpHとを確認する。なお、pHは、pHメーター(型番:HM-31、東亜ディーケーケー(株)製)を用いて25℃で測定される値である。
It can be confirmed that the dye is a pH-sensitive dye by the following method.
0.1 g of the dye is dissolved in 100 mL of a mixed solution of ethanol and water (ethanol / water = 1/2 (mass ratio)), and 0.1 mol / L (1N) aqueous hydrochloric acid solution is added to adjust pH = 1. Titrate with 0.01 mol / L (0.01 N) sodium hydroxide aqueous solution to confirm the color change and the pH at which the color change appears. The pH is a value measured at 25 ° C. using a pH meter (model number: HM-31, manufactured by Toa DKK Co., Ltd.).
 色素の発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長は、視認性の観点から、550nm以上であることが好ましく、550nm以上700nm以下であることがより好ましく、550nm以上650nm以下であることが更に好ましい。
 また、色素は、発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長を1つのみ有していてもよく、2つ以上有していてもよい。色素が発色時における波長範囲400nm~780nmの極大吸収波長を2つ以上有する場合は、2つ以上の上記極大吸収波長のうち、吸光度の最も大きい上記極大吸収波長が450nm以上であればよい。
 本開示における極大吸収波長の測定方法は、大気の雰囲気下で、25℃にて分光光度計:UV3100((株)島津製作所製)を用いて、400nm~780nmの波長範囲で透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を測定するものとする。
The maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm during color development of the dye is preferably 550 nm or more, more preferably 550 nm or more and 700 nm or less, and further preferably 550 nm or more and 650 nm or less from the viewpoint of visibility. preferable.
Further, the dye may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more maximum absorption wavelengths. When the dye has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm at the time of color development, the maximum absorption wavelength having the largest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 450 nm or more.
The method for measuring the maximum absorption wavelength in the present disclosure is to measure a transmission spectrum in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) at 25 ° C. in an atmosphere of air. , The wavelength at which the light intensity becomes minimum (maximum absorption wavelength) shall be measured.
 露光により発色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 また、露光により消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物、ジフェニルメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素、アントラキノン系色素等が挙げられる。
 中でも、色素としては、視認性の観点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
 ロイコ化合物としては、トリアリールメタン系(例えばトリフェニルメタン系)、スピロピラン系、フルオラン系、ジフェニルメタン系、ローダミンラクタム系、インドリルフタリド系、ロイコオーラミン系等のロイコ化合物が挙げられる。中でも、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリアリールメタン系色素)が好ましく、トリフェニルメタン系色素がより好ましい。
 また、ロイコ化合物としては、視認性の観点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環を有し、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又は、スルトン環が開環又は閉環するものが好ましく、スルトン環を有し、スルトン環が閉環して消色するロイコ化合物であることがより好ましい。
Examples of dyes that develop color upon exposure include leuco compounds.
Examples of dyes that are decolorized by exposure include leuco compounds, diphenylmethane dyes, oxazine dyes, xanthene dyes, iminonaphthoquinone dyes, azomethine dyes, and anthraquinone dyes.
Among them, leuco compounds are preferable as the dye from the viewpoint of visibility.
Examples of the leuco compound include triarylmethane-based (eg, triphenylmethane-based), spiropyran-based, fluoran-based, diphenylmethane-based, rhodamine lactam-based, indolylphthalide-based, leucoauramine-based leuco compounds. Of these, leuco compounds having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dyes) are preferable, and triphenylmethane dyes are more preferable.
Further, as the leuco compound, from the viewpoint of visibility, a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring is preferable, and a lactone ring, a sultin ring, or a sultone ring that is opened or closed is preferable, and a sultone ring is used. It is more preferable to use a leuco compound having a sultone ring that is closed and decolorized.
 色素は、色素の析出による欠陥を防止する目的で、水溶性の化合物であることが好ましい。
 また、色素は、22℃におけるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が、1g以上であることが好ましく、5g以上であることがより好ましい。
The dye is preferably a water-soluble compound for the purpose of preventing defects due to the precipitation of the dye.
The solubility of the dye in 100 g of water having a pH of 7.0 at 22 ° C. is preferably 1 g or more, more preferably 5 g or more.
 中間層は、色素を、1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
 上記中間層における色素の含有量は、視認性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.1質量%~8質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることが更に好ましく、1.0質量%~3.0質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The intermediate layer may contain one kind of dye or two or more kinds of dye.
From the viewpoint of visibility, the content of the dye in the intermediate layer is preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, and is 0.1% by mass to 8% by mass, based on the total mass of the intermediate layer. It is more preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass, further preferably 1.0% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
〔その他の界面活性剤〕
 中間層は、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤以外の界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。
 その他の界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができ、また、公知のものを用いることができる。
 中間層におけるその他の界面活性剤の含有量は、スジの発生抑制の観点から、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤の含有量よりも少ないことが好ましい。
 その他の界面活性剤を含有する場合、その他の界面活性剤の含有量は、スジの発生抑制、及び、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、中間層の全質量に対して、0.01質量%以上2.0質量%未満であることが好ましい。
[Other surfactants]
The intermediate layer may contain a surfactant other than the surfactant having a fluorine atom.
As the other surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic) and amphoteric surfactants can be used, and known surfactants can be used.
The content of the other surfactant in the intermediate layer is preferably smaller than the content of the fluorine atom-containing surfactant from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks.
In the case of containing other surfactant, the content of the other surfactant is 0 relative to the total mass of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface at the time of transfer. It is preferably 0.01% by mass or more and less than 2.0% by mass.
〔無機フィラー〕
 中間層は、無機フィラーを含むことができる。本開示における無機フィラーは特に制限はない。シリカ粒子、酸化アルミニウム粒子、酸化ジルコニウム粒子等が挙げられ、シリカ粒子がより好ましい。透明性の観点から粒径の小さい粒子が好ましく、100nm以下の平均粒径のものが更に好ましい。例えば市販品であればスノーテックス(登録商標)が好適に用いられる。
[Inorganic filler]
The intermediate layer can include an inorganic filler. The inorganic filler in the present disclosure is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include silica particles, aluminum oxide particles and zirconium oxide particles, and silica particles are more preferable. From the viewpoint of transparency, particles having a small particle size are preferable, and particles having an average particle size of 100 nm or less are more preferable. For example, if it is a commercially available product, Snowtex (registered trademark) is preferably used.
 上記中間層における上記粒子の体積分率(中間層における粒子が占める体積割合)は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全体積に対し、5%~90%であることが好ましく、10%~80%であることがより好ましく、15%~70%であることが更に好ましく、20%~60%であることが特に好ましい。
 後述するように、中間層を2層にする場合には、全中間層における上記粒子の体積分率(中間層における粒子が占める体積割合)は、中間層と感光層との密着性の観点から、中間層の全体積に対し、2%~90%であることが好ましく、3%~80%であることがより好ましく、5%~20%であることが更に好ましく、10%~20%であることが特に好ましい。
The volume fraction of the particles in the intermediate layer (volume ratio of the particles in the intermediate layer) is 5% to 90% with respect to the total volume of the intermediate layer from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. It is preferably 10% to 80%, more preferably 15% to 70%, particularly preferably 20% to 60%.
As will be described later, when the number of intermediate layers is two, the volume fraction of the particles in all the intermediate layers (volume ratio of particles in the intermediate layer) is from the viewpoint of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive layer. The total volume of the intermediate layer is preferably 2% to 90%, more preferably 3% to 80%, further preferably 5% to 20%, and 10% to 20%. It is particularly preferable that
〔pH調整剤〕
 中間層は、pH調整剤を含むことができる。pH調整剤を含むことで、中間層中の色素の発色状態又は消色状態をより安定的に維持することができ、密着性がより向上する。
 本開示におけるpH調整剤は特に制限はない。例えば水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、水酸化リチウム、有機アミン、有機アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。水溶性の観点から水酸化ナトリウムが好ましい。感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性の観点からは、有機アンモニウム塩が好ましい。
 有機アンモニウム塩としては、第1級アンモニウム塩、第2級アンモニウム塩、第3級アンモニウム塩、第4級アンモニウム塩が挙げられ、第4級アンモニウム塩が好ましい。
 第4級アンモニウム塩としては、置換基を有していてもよいテトラアルキルアンモニウムヒドロキシドが挙げられ、具体的な例としては、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、トリエチルメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラヘキシルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ヘキサデシルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウム、ベンジルトリエチルアンモニウム、トリス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)メチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド等が挙げられる。
 中でも、炭素数1~30(好ましくは炭素数10~30、より好ましくは炭素数10~25)のアルキル基を有するテトラアルキルアンモニウムヒドロキシドがより好ましい。置換基を有する場合の置換基としては、炭素数6~12のアリール基(例えばフェニル基)、ヒドロキシ基等を挙げることができる。
[PH adjuster]
The intermediate layer can include a pH adjuster. By including the pH adjusting agent, the coloring state or the decoloring state of the dye in the intermediate layer can be maintained more stably, and the adhesiveness is further improved.
The pH adjusting agent in the present disclosure is not particularly limited. Examples thereof include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, organic amines, organic ammonium salts and the like. Sodium hydroxide is preferred from the viewpoint of water solubility. From the viewpoint of the adhesiveness between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer, organic ammonium salts are preferable.
Examples of the organic ammonium salt include a primary ammonium salt, a secondary ammonium salt, a tertiary ammonium salt, and a quaternary ammonium salt, and a quaternary ammonium salt is preferable.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt include tetraalkylammonium hydroxide which may have a substituent, and specific examples thereof include tetramethylammonium hydroxide, triethylmethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, Examples include tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, tetrahexylammonium hydroxide, hexadecyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, choline, benzyltrimethylammonium, benzyltriethylammonium, tris (2-hydroxyethyl) methylammonium hydroxide, etc. .
Among them, tetraalkylammonium hydroxide having an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (preferably 10 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 10 to 25 carbon atoms) is more preferable. When it has a substituent, examples of the substituent include an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, a phenyl group), a hydroxy group and the like.
〔中間層の平均厚さ〕
 上記中間層の平均厚さは、感光性樹脂層と中間層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2μmが特に好ましい。
 また、上記中間層の平均厚さは、上記感光性樹脂層の平均厚さよりも薄いことが好ましい。
[Average thickness of intermediate layer]
The average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.3 μm to 5 μm, and more preferably 0.3 μm, from the viewpoint of adhesion between the photosensitive resin layer and the intermediate layer and pattern formability. ˜2 μm is particularly preferred.
The average thickness of the intermediate layer is preferably thinner than the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer.
 上記中間層は、2層以上の層を有することができる。
 上記中間層が2層以上の層を有する場合、各層の平均厚さは上記範囲内であれば特に限定されないが、上記中間層における2層以上の層のうち、感光性樹脂層に最も近い層の平均厚さは、中間層と感光性樹脂層との密着性、及び、パターン形成性の観点から、0.3μm~10μmが好ましく、0.3μm~5μmがより好ましく、0.3μm~2μmが特に好ましい。
 本開示における各層の平均厚さの測定方法は、転写材料の面方向に対し垂直な方向の断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、測定するものとする。また、平均厚さは、厚さを10点以上測定し、その平均値とする。
The intermediate layer may have two or more layers.
When the intermediate layer has two or more layers, the average thickness of each layer is not particularly limited as long as it is within the above range, but of the two or more layers in the intermediate layer, the layer closest to the photosensitive resin layer. The average thickness of is preferably 0.3 μm to 10 μm, more preferably 0.3 μm to 5 μm, and more preferably 0.3 μm to 2 μm from the viewpoints of adhesion between the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and pattern formability. Particularly preferred.
In the method of measuring the average thickness of each layer in the present disclosure, the cross section in the direction perpendicular to the surface direction of the transfer material is observed and measured by a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The average thickness is the average value obtained by measuring the thickness at 10 or more points.
〔中間層の形成方法〕
 本開示における中間層は、中間層を形成するのに必要な成分、及び、水溶性溶剤を含有する中間層形成組成物を調整し、塗布及び乾燥して形成することができる。各成分、及び、水溶性溶剤をあらかじめ定めた割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解して中間層を形成するための中間層形成用組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液をあらかじめ定めた割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、孔径3.0μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過した後に、使用に供することもできる。
[Method of forming intermediate layer]
The intermediate layer in the present disclosure can be formed by adjusting, coating and drying an intermediate layer-forming composition containing components necessary for forming the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent. It is possible to prepare a composition for forming an intermediate layer for forming an intermediate layer by mixing the respective components and a water-soluble solvent in a predetermined ratio and by an arbitrary method and stirring and dissolving. For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in a solvent in advance and then mixing the obtained solutions in a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above can also be used after being filtered using a filter having a pore size of 3.0 μm or the like.
 中間層形成用組成物を仮支持体に塗布し、乾燥させることで、仮支持体上に中間層を形成することができる。塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。 The intermediate layer can be formed on the temporary support by applying the intermediate layer forming composition to the temporary support and drying the composition. The coating method is not particularly limited, and the coating can be performed by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating and the like.
-中間層形成組成物-
 中間層形成組成物は、中間層に含まれる成分、及び、水溶性溶剤を含むことが好ましい。各成分に水溶性溶剤を含有させて粘度を調節し、塗布及び乾燥することで、中間層を好適に形成することができる。
 水溶性溶剤としては、水、炭素数1~6のアルコール化合物が挙げられ、水を含むことが好ましい。炭素数1~6のアルコール化合物としては、メタノール、エタノール、n-プロパノール、イソプロパノール、n-ブタノール、n-ペンタノール、n-ヘキサノールが挙げられ、メタノール、エタノール、n-プロパノール、及び、イソプロパノールよりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種が好ましい。
-Intermediate layer forming composition-
The intermediate layer forming composition preferably contains a component contained in the intermediate layer and a water-soluble solvent. A water-soluble solvent is contained in each component to adjust the viscosity, and the intermediate layer can be suitably formed by coating and drying.
Examples of the water-soluble solvent include water and alcohol compounds having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and water is preferable. Examples of the alcohol compound having 1 to 6 carbon atoms include methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, n-pentanol and n-hexanol, which are composed of methanol, ethanol, n-propanol and isopropanol. At least one selected from the group is preferable.
<感光性樹脂層>
 本開示に係る転写材料は、感光性樹脂層を有する。
 本開示における感光性樹脂層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層であり、公知のポジ型感光性樹脂層を用いることができる。また、本開示において用いられる感光性樹脂層は、感度及び解像度の観点から、酸分解性樹脂、すなわち、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体と、光酸発生剤とを含むことが好ましく、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体と、光酸発生剤とを含む化学増幅ポジ型感光性樹脂層であることがより好ましい。
 後述するオニウム塩、オキシムスルホネート化合物等の光酸発生剤は、活性放射線(活性光線)に感応して生成される酸が、上記重合体中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用するので、1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、多数の脱保護反応に寄与し、量子収率は1を超え、例えば、10の数乗のような大きい値となり、いわゆる化学増幅の結果として、高感度が得られる。
 一方、活性光線に感応する光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物を用いた場合、逐次型光化学反応によりカルボキシ基を生成するが、その量子収率は必ず1以下であり、化学増幅型には該当しない。
<Photosensitive resin layer>
The transfer material according to the present disclosure has a photosensitive resin layer.
The photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is a positive photosensitive resin layer, and a known positive photosensitive resin layer can be used. Further, the photosensitive resin layer used in the present disclosure is, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, an acid-decomposable resin, that is, a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photoacid generator. It is preferable that the chemical amplification positive type photosensitive resin layer contains a photo-acid generator and a polymer having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group.
The photo-acid generators such as onium salts and oxime sulfonate compounds described below have an acid generated in response to actinic radiation (actinic rays) as a catalyst for deprotection of the protected acid group in the polymer. Since it acts, the acid generated by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, which is a large value such as 10 to the power of so-called chemical amplification. As a result, high sensitivity is obtained.
On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator sensitive to actinic rays, a carboxy group is produced by a sequential photochemical reaction, but its quantum yield is always 1 or less, which is not a chemical amplification type.
〔酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を有する重合体A1〕
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位(「構成単位A」ともいう。)を有する重合体(単に「重合体A1」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、構成単位Aを有する重合体A1に加え、他の重合体を含んでいてもよい。本開示においては、構成単位Aを有する重合体A1及び他の重合体をあわせて、「重合体成分」ともいう。
 重合体A1は、露光により生じる触媒量の酸等の酸性物質の作用により、重合体A1中の酸分解性基で保護された酸基が脱保護反応を受け酸基となる。この酸基により、現像液への溶解が可能となる。
[Polymer A1 having a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group]
The positive photosensitive resin layer contains a polymer (also simply referred to as "polymer A1") having a structural unit (also referred to as "structural unit A") having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. Is preferred.
In addition to the polymer A1 having the structural unit A, the positive photosensitive resin layer may contain another polymer. In the present disclosure, the polymer A1 having the structural unit A and other polymers are collectively referred to as a “polymer component”.
In the polymer A1, the acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group in the polymer A1 undergoes a deprotection reaction to become an acid group by the action of a catalytic amount of an acid substance such as an acid generated by exposure. This acid group enables dissolution in the developer.
 重合体A1は、付加重合型の樹脂であることが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を有する重合体であることがより好ましい。なお、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位、ビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を有していてもよい。
 以下に構成単位Aの好ましい態様について説明する。
The polymer A1 is preferably an addition polymerization type resin, and more preferably a polymer having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester. In addition, you may have a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or its ester, for example, the structural unit derived from a styrene compound, the structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, etc.
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the structural unit A will be described.
-構成単位A-
 上記重合体成分は、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを有する重合体A1を含むことが好ましい。感光性樹脂層が構成単位Aを有する重合体A1を含むことにより、極めて高感度な化学増幅ポジ型の感光性樹脂層とすることができる。
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層に含まれる重合体A1は、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 本開示における酸基及び酸分解性基は、公知のものを使用でき、特に限定されない。具体的な酸基としては、カルボキシ基、及び、フェノール性水酸基(「フェノール性ヒドロキシ基」ともいう。)が好ましく挙げられる。また、酸分解性基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、1-アルコキシアルキル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基、又は、テトラヒドロフラニル基等のアセタール型官能基)又は酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチル基等の第三級アルキル基、tert-ブチルオキシカルボニル基等の第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基)を用いることができる。
 これらの中でも、酸分解性基としては、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基であることが好ましい。
 また、酸分解性基としては、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合における導電配線の線幅のバラツキが抑制される観点から、分子量が300以下の酸分解性基であることが好ましい。
-Structural unit A-
The polymer component preferably contains a polymer A1 having a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group. When the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer A1 having the structural unit A, it is possible to obtain a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin layer having extremely high sensitivity.
The polymer A1 contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer may be only one kind or two or more kinds.
As the acid group and the acid-decomposable group in the present disclosure, known groups can be used and are not particularly limited. Preferred specific acid groups include a carboxy group and a phenolic hydroxyl group (also referred to as "phenolic hydroxy group"). The acid-decomposable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal-type functional group such as a 1-alkoxyalkyl group, a tetrahydropyranyl group, or a tetrahydrofuranyl group) or an acid-decomposable group. A difficult group (for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl group, a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group such as a tert-butyloxycarbonyl group) can be used.
Among these, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal.
Further, the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variation in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aは、感度及び解像度の観点から、下記式A1~式A3のいずれかにより表される構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is preferably a structural unit represented by any of the following formulas A1 to A3 from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式A1中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R11及びR12の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R13はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R14は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、R15は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
 式A2中、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R21及びR22の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R23はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R21又はR22と、R23とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R24はそれぞれ独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アリールカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基又はシクロアルキル基を表し、mは0~3の整数を表す。
 式A3中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31及びR32の少なくとも一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。
In formula A1, R 11 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may combine to form a cyclic ether, R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. , R 15 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
In formula A2, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. And R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic ether, and R 24 is independently a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group or an aryl group. Represents an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
In formula A3, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. ..
 上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基が、酸分解速度、及び、感度の観点から、アセタールの形で保護する構造である酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基であることが好ましい。 The acid group protected by the acid-decomposable group is preferably a carboxy group protected by an acid-decomposable group, which is a structure that protects in the form of acetal, from the viewpoint of acid decomposition rate and sensitivity.
 式A3中、R31又はR32がアルキル基の場合、炭素数は1~10のアルキル基が好ましい。R31又はR32がアリール基の場合、フェニル基が好ましい。R31及びR32は、それぞれ、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 式A3中、R33は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~6のアルキル基がより好ましい。
 また、R31~R33におけるアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 式A3中、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成することが好ましい。環状エーテルの環員数は特に制限はないが、5又は6であることが好ましく、5であることがより好ましい。
 式A3中、Xは単結合又はアリーレン基を表し、単結合が好ましい。アリーレン基は、置換基を有していてもよい。
 上記式A3で表される構成単位Aは、酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位である。重合体A1が式A3で表される構成単位Aを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また、解像度がより優れる。
In formula A3, when R 31 or R 32 is an alkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms is preferable. When R 31 or R 32 is an aryl group, a phenyl group is preferred. Each of R 31 and R 32 is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
In formula A3, R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
Further, the alkyl group and aryl group in R 31 to R 33 may have a substituent.
In formula A3, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to each other to form a cyclic ether, and it is preferable that R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are linked to each other to form a cyclic ether. The number of ring members of the cyclic ether is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or 6, and more preferably 5.
In formula A3, X 0 represents a single bond or an arylene group, and a single bond is preferable. The arylene group may have a substituent.
The structural unit A represented by the above formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected by an acid-decomposable group. When the polymer A1 contains the structural unit A represented by the formula A3, the sensitivity during pattern formation is excellent, and the resolution is further excellent.
 式A3中、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、重合体A1のガラス転移温度(Tg)をより低くし得るという観点から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
 より具体的には、重合体A1に含まれる構成単位Aの全量に対し、式A3におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位は20質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なお、構成単位A中の、式A3におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
In formula A3, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and is preferably a hydrogen atom from the viewpoint that the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A1 can be further lowered.
More specifically, with respect to the total amount of the structural unit A contained in the polymer A1, the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom is preferably 20% by mass or more.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities.
 また、式A1~式A3の好ましい態様としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0044~段落0058を参照することができる。 Also, as preferred embodiments of the formulas A1 to A3, reference can be made to paragraphs 0044 to 0058 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
 式A1~式A3において、酸分解性基は、感度の観点から、環状構造を有する基であることが好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環又はテトラヒドロピラン環構造を有する基であるがより好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環構造を有する基であることが更に好ましく、テトラヒドロフラニル基であることが特に好ましい。 In formulas A1 to A3, the acid-decomposable group is preferably a group having a cyclic structure, more preferably a group having a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring structure, and more preferably a tetrahydrofuran ring structure, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. A group is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group is particularly preferable.
 重合体A1を含む重合体成分における構成単位Aの含有量は、重合体成分の全質量に対して、10質量%~90質量%であることが好ましく、10質量%~70質量%であることがより好ましく、15質量%~50質量%であることが更に好ましく、20質量%~40質量%であることが特に好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度がより向上する。
 重合体A1を含む重合体成分における構成単位Aの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The content of the structural unit A in the polymer component including the polymer A1 is preferably 10% by mass to 90% by mass, and 10% by mass to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer component. Is more preferable, 15% by mass to 50% by mass is further preferable, and 20% by mass to 40% by mass is particularly preferable. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer component containing the polymer A1 can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
-構成単位B-
 重合体A1は、酸基を有する構成単位(「構成単位B」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Bは、保護基、例えば、酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さない酸基を含む構成単位である。重合体A1が構成単位Bを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
 本明細書における酸基とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基を意味する。酸基は、酸基を形成しうるモノマーを用いて、酸基を含む構成単位(構成単位B)として、重合体A1に組み込まれることが好ましい。
 酸基のpKaは、感度向上の観点から、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましい。また、酸基のpKaは、-5以上であることが好ましい。
-Structural unit B-
The polymer A1 may include a structural unit having an acid group (also referred to as “structural unit B”).
The structural unit B is a structural unit containing a protecting group, for example, an acid group not protected by an acid-decomposable group, that is, an acid group having no protecting group. When the polymer A1 contains the structural unit B, the sensitivity during pattern formation is improved, the polymer A1 is easily dissolved in an alkaline developing solution in the developing step after pattern exposure, and the developing time can be shortened.
The acid group in the present specification means a proton dissociable group having a pKa of 12 or less. The acid group is preferably incorporated in the polymer A1 as a structural unit containing an acid group (structural unit B) using a monomer capable of forming an acid group.
From the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity, the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less. The pKa of the acid group is preferably −5 or more.
 重合体A1が、構成単位Aと、保護基を有さない酸基を有する構成単位Bとを共重合成分として含み、ガラス転移温度を90℃以下とすることで、重合体A1を含有するポジ型感光性樹脂層は、転写性、仮支持体からの剥離性を良好なレベルに維持しつつ、パターン形成時の解像度及び感度がより良好となる。 The polymer A1 contains the structural unit A and a structural unit B having an acid group having no protective group as a copolymerization component, and has a glass transition temperature of 90 ° C. or lower, thereby containing the polymer A1. The mold-type photosensitive resin layer has better resolution and sensitivity during pattern formation while maintaining good transferability and releasability from the temporary support.
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性水酸基、及び、スルホニルイミド基等が例示される。中でも、カルボキシ基及びフェノール性水酸基よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の酸基が好ましい。
 重合体A1への酸基を有する構成単位の導入は、酸基を有するモノマーを共重合させることで行うことができる。
 構成単位Bである、酸基を含む構成単位は、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位若しくはビニル化合物に由来する構成単位に対して酸基が置換した構成単位、又は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位であることがより好ましい。
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group. Among them, at least one acid group selected from the group consisting of carboxy group and phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
Introduction of the structural unit having an acid group into the polymer A1 can be carried out by copolymerizing a monomer having an acid group.
The structural unit containing an acid group, which is the structural unit B, is derived from a structural unit derived from a styrene compound or a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound with an acid group, or derived from (meth) acrylic acid. It is more preferably a structural unit.
 構成単位Bとしては、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位、又は、フェノール性水酸基を有する構成単位が、パターン形成時の感度がより良好となるという観点から好ましい。
 構成単位Bを形成しうる酸基を有するモノマーは既述の例に限定されない。
As the structural unit B, a structural unit having a carboxy group or a structural unit having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable from the viewpoint that the sensitivity during pattern formation becomes better.
The monomer having an acid group capable of forming the structural unit B is not limited to the examples described above.
 重合体A1に含まれる構成単位Bは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体A1は、酸基を有する構成単位(構成単位B)を、重合体A1の全質量に対し、0.01質量%~20質量%含むことが好ましく、0.01質量%~15質量%含むことがより好ましく、0.01質量%~10質量%含むことが更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、パターン形成性がより良好となる。
 重合体A1における構成単位Bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認することができる。
The structural unit B contained in the polymer A1 may be only one type or two or more types.
The polymer A1 preferably contains the structural unit having an acid group (structural unit B) in an amount of 0.01% by mass to 20% by mass, and 0.01% by mass to 15% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer A1. It is more preferable that the content is 0.01 to 10% by mass. Within the above range, the pattern formability becomes better.
The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer A1 can be confirmed by an intensity ratio of peak intensities calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
-その他の構成単位-
 重合体A1は、既述の構成単位A及び構成単位B以外の、他の構成単位(以下、構成単位Cと称することがある。)を、本開示に係る転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲で含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、その他の不飽和化合物を挙げることができる。
 構成単位Cを用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、重合体A1の諸特性を調整することができる。特に、構成単位Cを適切に使用することで、重合体A1のTgを容易に調整することができる。
 ガラス転移温度を120℃以下とすることで、重合体A1を含有する感光性樹脂層は、転写性、仮支持体からの除去性を良好なレベルに維持しつつ、パターン形成時の解像度及び感度がより良好となる。
 重合体A1は、構成単位Cを1種のみ含んでもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
-Other components-
The polymer A1 contains other structural units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the structural unit C) other than the structural units A and B described above within a range that does not impair the effects of the transfer material according to the present disclosure. May be included.
The monomer forming the structural unit C is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, and unsaturated dicarboxylic acid diester. , Bicyclo unsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, other Mention may be made of saturated compounds.
By adjusting at least one of the type and the content using the structural unit C, various properties of the polymer A1 can be adjusted. In particular, by appropriately using the structural unit C, the Tg of the polymer A1 can be easily adjusted.
By setting the glass transition temperature to 120 ° C. or less, the photosensitive resin layer containing the polymer A1 maintains the transferability and the removability from the temporary support at a good level, and the resolution and sensitivity during pattern formation. Will be better.
The polymer A1 may include only one type of the structural unit C or may include two or more types of the structural unit C.
 構成単位Cは、具体的には、スチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロペンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレートなどを重合して形成される構成単位を挙げることができる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物を挙げることができる。 The structural unit C is specifically styrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinylbenzoate, ethyl vinylbenzoate, methyl (meth) acrylate, ( Ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-Hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol monoacetoacetate mono (meth ) A constituent unit formed by polymerizing acrylate or the like can be mentioned. In addition, compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP-A-2004-264623 can be mentioned.
 構成単位Cは、解像性の観点から、塩基性基を有する構成単位を含むことが好ましい。
 上記塩基性基としては、解像性の観点から、窒素原子を有する基であることが好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、芳香族アミノ基、又は、含窒素複素芳香環基であることがより好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基、又は、含窒素複素芳香環基であることが更に好ましく、脂肪族アミノ基が特に好ましい。
 脂肪族アミノ基としては、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基のいずれであってもよいが、解像性の観点から、第二級アミノ基、又は、第三級アミノ基であることが好ましい。
 芳香族アミノ基としては、アニリノ基、モノアルキルアニリノ基、又は、ジアルキルアニリノ基であることが好ましく、モノアルキルアニリノ基、又は、ジアルキルアニリノ基であることがより好ましい。
 含窒素複素芳香環基における含窒素複素芳香環としては、ピリジン環、イミダゾール環、又は、トリアゾール環であることが好ましく、ピリジン環、又は、イミダゾール環であることがより好ましく、ピリジン環であることが特に好ましい。
 また、上記含窒素複素芳香環基は、含窒素複素芳香環上に更に置換基を有していてもよい。上記置換基としては、特に制限はないが、アルキル基であることが好ましく、メチル基であることがより好ましい。
From the viewpoint of resolution, the structural unit C preferably contains a structural unit having a basic group.
From the viewpoint of resolution, the basic group is preferably a group having a nitrogen atom, more preferably an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, An aliphatic amino group or a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group is more preferable, and an aliphatic amino group is particularly preferable.
The aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, or a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolution, a secondary amino group, or, It is preferably a tertiary amino group.
The aromatic amino group is preferably an anilino group, a monoalkylanilino group, or a dialkylanilino group, and more preferably a monoalkylanilino group or a dialkylanilino group.
The nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring in the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group is preferably a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring or a triazole ring, more preferably a pyridine ring or an imidazole ring, and a pyridine ring Is particularly preferable.
The nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group may further have a substituent on the nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring. The substituent is not particularly limited, but an alkyl group is preferable, and a methyl group is more preferable.
 塩基性基を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、具体的には、メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸2-(ジイソプロピルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、アクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、N-[3-(ジメチルアミノ)プロピル]アクリルアミド、アリルアミン、4-アミノスチレン、4-ビニルピリジン、2-ビニルピリジン、3-ビニルピリジン、1-ビニルイミダゾール、2-メチル-1-ビニルイミダゾール、1-アリルイミダゾール、1-ビニル-1,2,4-トリアゾール等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the monomer forming the structural unit having a basic group include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, and acrylic acid 2 , 2,6,6-Tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl acrylate, methacrylic acid 2- (diethylamino) ethyl, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl acrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl acrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl acrylate, 2- (diisopropylamino) ethyl methacrylate, 2-morpholinoethyl methacrylate, 2-morpholinoethyl acrylate, N- [3 -(Dimethylamino) propyl] acrylamide, allylamine, 4-aminostyrene, 4-vinylpyridine, 2-vinylpyridine, 3-vinylpyridine, 1-vinylimidazole, 2-methyl-1-vinylimidazole, 1-allylimidazole, 1-Vinyl-1,2,4-triazole and the like can be mentioned.
 また、構成単位Cとしては、芳香環を有する構成単位、又は、脂肪族環式骨格を有する構成単位が、得られる転写材料の電気特性を向上させる観点で好ましい。これら構成単位を形成するモノマーとして、具体的には、スチレン、メチルスチレン、α-メチルスチレン、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。中でも、構成単位Cとしては、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート由来の構成単位が好ましく挙げられる。 Further, as the structural unit C, a structural unit having an aromatic ring or a structural unit having an aliphatic cyclic skeleton is preferable from the viewpoint of improving the electrical characteristics of the obtained transfer material. Specific examples of the monomer that forms these structural units include styrene, methylstyrene, α-methylstyrene, dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl (meth) acrylate. , And benzyl (meth) acrylate and the like. Among them, the structural unit C is preferably a structural unit derived from cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate.
 また、構成単位Cを形成するモノマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが、密着性の観点で好ましい。中でも、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが密着性の観点でより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシルが挙げられる。 Further, as the monomer forming the structural unit C, for example, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Above all, alkyl (meth) acrylate having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is more preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion. Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 重合体成分における構成単位Cの含有量は、重合体成分の全質量に対し、90質量%以下が好ましく、85質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、0質量%でもよいが、10質量%以上であることが好ましく、20質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。 The content of the structural unit C in the polymer component is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the polymer component. The lower limit may be 0% by mass, but is preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or more. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesiveness are further improved.
 以下、本開示における重合体A1の好ましい例を挙げるが、本開示は以下の例示に限定されない。なお、下記例示化合物における構成単位の比率、重量平均分子量は、好ましい物性を得るために適宜選択される。 Hereinafter, preferred examples of the polymer A1 in the present disclosure will be given, but the present disclosure is not limited to the following examples. The ratio of the constituent units and the weight average molecular weight in the following exemplified compounds are appropriately selected to obtain preferable physical properties.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
-重合体A1のガラス転移温度:Tg-
 本開示における重合体A1のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、解像性、及び、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、20℃以上であることが好ましく、20℃以上90℃以下であることがより好ましく、20℃以上60℃以下であることが更に好ましく、30℃以上50℃以下であることが特に好ましい。
-Glass transition temperature of polymer A1: Tg-
The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the polymer A1 according to the present disclosure is preferably 20 ° C. or higher, and more preferably 20 ° C. or higher and 90 ° C. or lower, from the viewpoint of further enhancing the resolution and the effect of the present disclosure. Is more preferable, 20 ° C. or more and 60 ° C. or less is more preferable, and 30 ° C. or more and 50 ° C. or less is particularly preferable.
 本開示における重合体のTgを、既述の好ましい範囲に調整する方法としては、例えば、目的とする重合体の各構成単位の単独重合体のTgと各構成単位の質量比より、FOX式を指針にして、目的とする重合体のTgを制御することが可能である。
 FOX式について
 重合体に含まれる第1の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg1、第1の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW1とし、第2の構成単位の単独重合体のTgをTg2とし、第2の構成単位の共重合体における質量分率をW2としたときに、第1の構成単位と第2の構成単位とを含む共重合体のTg0(K)は、以下の式にしたがって推定することが可能である。
 FOX式:1/Tg0=(W1/Tg1)+(W2/Tg2)
 既述のFOX式を用いて、共重合体に含まれる各構成単位の種類と質量分率を調整して、所望のTgを有する共重合体を得ることができる。
 また、重合体の重量平均分子量を調整することにより、重合体のTgを調整することも可能である。
As a method of adjusting the Tg of the polymer in the present disclosure to the preferable range described above, for example, from the Tg of the homopolymer of each constitutional unit of the target polymer and the mass ratio of each constitutional unit, a FOX formula is obtained. It is possible to control the Tg of the desired polymer using the guidelines.
Regarding the FOX formula: Tg of the homopolymer of the first constitutional unit contained in the polymer is Tg1, and the mass fraction of the copolymer of the first constitutional unit is W1, and Tg of the homopolymer of the second constitutional unit. Is Tg2 and the mass fraction of the copolymer of the second constitutional unit is W2, the Tg0 (K) of the copolymer containing the first constitutional unit and the second constitutional unit is It can be estimated according to the formula.
FOX formula: 1 / Tg0 = (W1 / Tg1) + (W2 / Tg2)
A copolymer having a desired Tg can be obtained by adjusting the type and mass fraction of each structural unit contained in the copolymer using the above-mentioned FOX formula.
It is also possible to adjust the Tg of the polymer by adjusting the weight average molecular weight of the polymer.
-重合体A1の酸価-
 重合体A1の酸価は、解像性の観点から、0mgKOH/g以上100mgKOH/g以下であることが好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上50mgKOH/g以下であることがより好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上20mgKOH/g以下であることが更に好ましく、0mgKOH/g以上10mgKOH/g以下であることが特に好ましい。
—Acid Value of Polymer A1—
From the viewpoint of resolution, the acid value of the polymer A1 is preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 100 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 0 mgKOH / g or more and 50 mgKOH / g or less, and 0 mgKOH / g or more 20 mgKOH / g. It is more preferably at most g, particularly preferably at least 0 mgKOH / g and at most 10 mgKOH / g.
 本開示における重合体の酸価は、重合体1gあたりの酸性成分を中和するのに要する水酸化カリウムの質量を表したものである。具体的には、測定サンプルをテトラヒドロフラン/水=9/1(体積比)混合溶媒に溶解し、電位差滴定装置(商品名:AT-510、京都電子工業(株)製)を用いて、得られた溶液を25℃において、0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液で中和滴定する。滴定pH曲線の変曲点を滴定終点として、次式により酸価を算出する。
   A=56.11×Vs×0.1×f/w
 A:酸価(mgKOH/g)
 Vs:滴定に要した0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の使用量(mL)
 f:0.1mol/L水酸化ナトリウム水溶液の力価
 w:測定サンプルの質量(g)(固形分換算)
The acid value of the polymer in the present disclosure represents the mass of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize the acidic component per 1 g of the polymer. Specifically, the measurement sample was dissolved in a mixed solvent of tetrahydrofuran / water = 9/1 (volume ratio) and obtained using a potentiometric titrator (trade name: AT-510, manufactured by Kyoto Electronics Manufacturing Co., Ltd.). The solution is neutralized and titrated with a 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution at 25 ° C. Using the inflection point of the titration pH curve as the end point of titration, the acid value is calculated by the following formula.
A = 56.11 × Vs × 0.1 × f / w
A: Acid value (mgKOH / g)
Vs: amount of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution used for titration (mL)
f: titer of 0.1 mol / L sodium hydroxide aqueous solution w: mass of measurement sample (g) (solid content conversion)
-重合体A1の分子量:Mw-
 重合体A1の分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、10,000以上60,000以下であることが好ましく、15,000以上60,000以下がより好ましく、20,000以上50,000以下が更に好ましい。
-Molecular weight of polymer A1: Mw-
The molecular weight of the polymer A1 is a polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight, and is preferably 10,000 or more and 60,000 or less, more preferably 15,000 or more and 60,000 or less, from the viewpoint of more exerting the effect in the present disclosure. It is more preferably 20,000 or more and 50,000 or less.
 なお、本開示における重合体の重量平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)によって測定することができ、測定装置としては、様々な市販の装置を用いることができ、装置の内容、及び、測定技術は同当業者に公知である。
 ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)による重量平均分子量の測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8220GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super HZM-M(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ4000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ3000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)、Super HZ2000(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)をそれぞれ1本、直列に連結したものを用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いることができる。
 また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.2質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μL、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行うことができる。
 検量線は、東ソー(株)製の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」及び「A-1000」の7サンプルのいずれかを用いて作製できる。
The weight average molecular weight of the polymer in the present disclosure can be measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography), and various commercially available devices can be used as the measuring device. Measurement techniques are known to those skilled in the art.
The weight average molecular weight is measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) using HLC (registered trademark) -8220 GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as a measuring device and TSKgel (registered trademark) Super HZM-M (4) as a column. .6 mmID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, Super HZ4000 (4.6 mmID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ3000 (4.6 mmID × 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation), Super HZ2000 (4.6 mmID). It is possible to use THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent by using one in which each of x15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corp.) is connected in series.
The measurement conditions are as follows: a sample concentration of 0.2 mass%, a flow rate of 0.35 ml / min, a sample injection amount of 10 μL, and a measurement temperature of 40 ° C., using a differential refractive index (RI) detector. be able to.
The calibration curve is “standard sample TSK standard, polystyrene” manufactured by Tosoh Corporation: “F-40”, “F-20”, “F-4”, “F-1”, “A-5000”, “A-5000”, It can be manufactured using any of the seven samples of "A-2500" and "A-1000".
 重合体A1の数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。 The ratio (dispersion) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A1 is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, and more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
-重合体A1の製造方法-
 重合体A1の製造方法(合成法)は特に限定されないが、一例を挙げると、構成単位Aを形成するためのモノマー、更に必要に応じて、その他の構成単位Cを形成するための重合性単量体を含む有機溶剤中、重合開始剤を用いて重合することにより合成することができる。また、いわゆる高分子反応で合成することもできる。
-Method for producing polymer A1-
The production method (synthesis method) of the polymer A1 is not particularly limited, but an example thereof is a monomer for forming the structural unit A, and optionally a polymerizable monomer for forming the other structural unit C. It can be synthesized by polymerizing using a polymerization initiator in an organic solvent containing a monomer. It can also be synthesized by a so-called polymer reaction.
 本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層における重合体成分の含有量は、スジの発生抑制、及び、転写時の上記転写面における密着性の観点から、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、75質量%以上であることが好ましく、80質量%以上であることがより好ましく、90質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、90質量%~99.9質量%であることが特に好ましい。
 また、ポジ型感光性樹脂層における重合体A1の含有量は、配線欠陥抑制、及び、解像性の観点から、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、75質量%~99.9質量%であることが好ましく、80質量%~99質量%であることがより好ましく、90質量%~95質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The content of the polymer component in the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure is 75% by mass with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, from the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of streaks and the adhesion on the transfer surface during transfer. % Or more, more preferably 80% by mass or more, further preferably 90% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 99.9% by mass.
The content of the polymer A1 in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 75% by mass to 99.9% by mass based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer from the viewpoint of suppressing wiring defects and resolution. %, More preferably 80% by mass to 99% by mass, and particularly preferably 90% by mass to 95% by mass.
〔他の重合体〕
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、重合体成分として、重合体A1に加え、本開示に係る転写材料の効果を損なわない範囲において、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含まない重合体(「他の重合体」と称する場合がある。)を更に含んでいてもよい。
 本開示における重合体成分は、特に述べない限り、重合体A1に加え、必要に応じて添加される他の重合体を含めたものを意味するものとする。なお、後述する架橋剤、分散剤及び界面活性剤に該当する化合物は、高分子化合物であっても、重合体成分に含まないものとする。
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層が他の重合体を含む場合、他の重合体の含有量は、全重合体成分中、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、20質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
[Other polymers]
The positive photosensitive resin layer does not include, as a polymer component, a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, in addition to the polymer A1, as long as the effect of the transfer material according to the present disclosure is not impaired. It may further contain a polymer (sometimes referred to as "other polymer").
Unless otherwise specified, the polymer component in the present disclosure is meant to include, in addition to the polymer A1, other polymers optionally added. The compounds corresponding to the cross-linking agent, the dispersant, and the surfactant, which will be described later, are not included in the polymer component even if they are polymer compounds.
When the positive photosensitive resin layer contains another polymer, the content of the other polymer is preferably 50% by mass or less, and more preferably 30% by mass or less, based on all the polymer components. Is more preferably 20% by mass or less.
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、重合体A1に加え、他の重合体を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合体として、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンを用いることができ、市販されている、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及び、SMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及び、ARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及び、Joncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等を用いることもできる。
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain only one type of other polymer in addition to the polymer A1, or may contain two or more types thereof.
As another polymer, for example, polyhydroxystyrene can be used, and commercially available SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (above, manufactured by Sartomer). , ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC-3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (all produced by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Joncryl 690, Joncr. , Joncryl 67, and Joncryl 586 (all manufactured by BASF) can also be used.
〔光酸発生剤〕
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、電子線等の活性光線を照射することにより酸を発生することができる化合物である。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300nm~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく用いることができる。
 本開示で使用される光酸発生剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上であることが好ましい。
[Photo acid generator]
The positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a photoacid generator.
The photo-acid generator used in the present disclosure is a compound capable of generating an acid when irradiated with an actinic ray such as an ultraviolet ray, a far ultraviolet ray, an X-ray or an electron beam.
The photo-acid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a compound that reacts with an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably 300 nm to 450 nm to generate an acid, but its chemical structure is not limited. Further, regarding a photo-acid generator which is not directly sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, when it is used in combination with a sensitizer, it is a compound which is sensitive to an actinic ray having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid. It can be preferably used in combination.
The photoacid generator used in the present disclosure is preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less, more preferably a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less, and a pKa of 2 or less. Particularly preferred are photoacid generators that generate the above acid. The lower limit of pKa is not particularly limited, but is preferably -10.0 or more, for example.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤及び非イオン性光酸発生剤を挙げることができる。
 イオン性光酸発生剤の例として、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、第四級アンモニウム塩類等を挙げることができる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類が特に好ましい。
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0114~段落0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましく用いることができる。
 非イオン性光酸発生剤の例としては、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物などを挙げることができる。これらの中でも、感度、解像度、及び、密着性の観点から、光酸発生剤がオキシムスルホネート化合物であることが好ましい。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、及び、イミドスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が例示できる。
Examples of the photoacid generator include an ionic photoacid generator and a nonionic photoacid generator.
Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are particularly preferable.
As the ionic photoacid generator, the ionic photoacid generator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-85643 can also be preferably used.
Examples of nonionic photoacid generators include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. Among these, the photoacid generator is preferably an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion. Specific examples of trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, and imidosulfonate compounds include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP 2011-221494A.
 オキシムスルホネート化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0084~段落0088に記載されたものを好適に用いることができる。 As the oxime sulfonate compound, those described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be preferably used.
 光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の観点から、オニウム塩化合物、及び、オキシムスルホネート化合物よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、好ましい光酸発生剤として、例えば、以下の構造の光酸発生剤が挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of onium salt compounds and oxime sulfonate compounds, and more preferably contains oxime sulfonate compounds. ..
In addition, examples of preferable photoacid generators include photoacid generators having the following structures.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層における光酸発生剤の含有量は、感度及び解像度の観点から、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~10質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~5質量%であることがより好ましい。
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of photoacid generator alone, or may contain two or more types.
From the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, the content of the photo-acid generator in the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.1% by mass to 10% by mass based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably 0.5% by mass to 5% by mass.
〔その他の添加剤〕
 本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層は、重合体A1を含む重合体成分、光酸発生剤及び溶剤に加え、必要に応じて、その他の添加剤を含むことができる。
 その他の添加剤としては、公知のものを用いることができ、例えば、可塑剤、増感剤、ヘテロ環状化合物、アルコキシシラン化合物、塩基性化合物、防錆剤、界面活性剤等が挙げられる。
 可塑剤、増感剤、ヘテロ環状化合物及びアルコキシシラン化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0097~段落0119に記載されたものが挙げられる。
[Other additives]
The positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may contain other additives, if necessary, in addition to the polymer component containing the polymer A1, the photoacid generator and the solvent.
As other additives, known ones can be used, and examples thereof include a plasticizer, a sensitizer, a heterocyclic compound, an alkoxysilane compound, a basic compound, a rust preventive, and a surfactant.
Examples of the plasticizer, sensitizer, heterocyclic compound and alkoxysilane compound include those described in paragraphs 0097 to 0119 of WO2018 / 179640.
-塩基性化合物-
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、塩基性化合物を更に含むことが好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用することができる。例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
-Basic compound-
The positive photosensitive resin layer preferably further contains a basic compound.
As the basic compound, any of the basic compounds used in the chemically amplified resist can be selected and used. Examples thereof include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and quaternary ammonium salts of carboxylic acids. Specific examples thereof include the compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0207 of JP 2011-221494A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 具体的には、脂肪族アミンとしては、例えば、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、ジシクロヘキシルメチルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、ジフェニルアミンなどが挙げられる。
 複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセンなどが挙げられる。
 また、塩基性化合物としては、N-シクロヘキシル-N’-[2-(4-モルホリニル)エチル]チオ尿素(CMTU)を好適に用いることができる。また、CMTUの市販品としては、東洋化成工業(株)製のものが挙げられる。
Specifically, examples of the aliphatic amine include di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, dicyclohexylamine, dicyclohexylmethylamine and the like. Be done.
Examples of aromatic amines include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine and the like.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinic acid amide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinoline, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonene, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0] -7 -For example, Undecen.
As the basic compound, N-cyclohexyl-N '-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea (CMTU) can be preferably used. Commercial products of CMTU include those manufactured by Toyo Kasei Co., Ltd.
 塩基性化合物としては、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合における導電配線の直線性の観点からは、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物が好ましい。 As the basic compound, a benzotriazole compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the linearity of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ベンゾトリアゾール骨格を有する化合物であれば制限されず、公知のベンゾトリアゾール化合物を用いることができる。
 ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、例えば、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-[N,N-ビス(2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチル]ベンゾトリアゾール、5-カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-(ヒドロキシメチル)-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アセチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-アミノベンゾトリアゾール、9-(1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-イルメチル)-9H-カルバゾール、1-クロロ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2-ピリジニル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-ヒドロキシベンゾトリアゾール、1-メチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-エチルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシエチル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-プロピルベンゾトリアゾール、1-(1’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(2’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、1-(3’-ヒドロキシプロピル)ベンゾトリアゾール、4-ヒドロキシ-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、5-メチル-1H-ベンゾトリアゾール、メチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、エチルベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、t-ブチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、シクロペンチルエチル-ベンゾトリアゾール-5-カルボキシレート、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-4-スルホン酸、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-アセトニトリル、1H-ベンゾトリアゾール-1-カルボキシアルデヒド、2-メチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール、2-エチル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾールなどが挙げられる。
The benzotriazole compound is not limited as long as it has a benzotriazole skeleton, and a known benzotriazole compound can be used.
Examples of the benzotriazole compound include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1- [N, N-bis (2-ethylhexyl) aminomethyl] benzotriazole, 5-carboxybenzotriazole, 1- (hydroxymethyl) -1H -Benzotriazole, 1-acetyl-1H-benzotriazole, 1-aminobenzotriazole, 9- (1H-benzotriazol-1-ylmethyl) -9H-carbazole, 1-chloro-1H-benzotriazole, 1- (2- Pyridinyl) benzotriazole, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-methylbenzotriazole, 1-ethylbenzotriazole, 1- (1'-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2'-hydroxyethyl) benzotriazole, 1-propyl Benzotriazole, 1- (1'-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (2'-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 1- (3'-hydroxypropyl) benzotriazole, 4-hydroxy-1H-benzotriazole, 5- Methyl-1H-benzotriazole, methylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, ethylbenzotriazole-5-carboxylate, t-butyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, cyclopentylethyl-benzotriazole-5-carboxylate, 1H- Examples thereof include benzotriazole-4-sulfonic acid, 1H-benzotriazole-1-acetonitrile, 1H-benzotriazole-1-carboxaldehyde, 2-methyl-2H-benzotriazole and 2-ethyl-2H-benzotriazole.
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、塩基性化合物を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%~5質量%であることが好ましく、0.005質量%~3質量%であることがより好ましい。
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of basic compound or two or more types of basic compounds.
The content of the basic compound is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5% by mass, and more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. preferable.
-界面活性剤-
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、厚さ均一性の観点から界面活性剤を含有することが好ましい。
 界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系(非イオン系)、又は、両性のいずれでも使用することができるが、好ましい界面活性剤はノニオン界面活性剤である。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤の例としては、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系、フッ素系界面活性剤を挙げることができる。また、以下商品名で、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)、エフトップ(JEMCO社製)、メガファック(DIC(株)製)、フロラード(住友スリーエム(株)製)、アサヒガード、サーフロン(旭硝子(株)製)、PolyFox(OMNOVA社製)、及び、SH-8400(東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)等の各シリーズを挙げることができる。
-Surfactant-
The positive photosensitive resin layer preferably contains a surfactant from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
As the surfactant, any of anionic, cationic, nonionic (nonionic) or amphoteric surfactants can be used, but the preferred surfactant is a nonionic surfactant.
Examples of nonionic surfactants include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkyl phenyl ethers, higher fatty acid diesters of polyoxyethylene glycol, silicone-based and fluorine-based surfactants. .. In addition, KP (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), F-top (manufactured by JEMCO), Megafac (manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.), and Florard (Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.) Asahi Glass, Surflon (manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PolyFox (manufactured by OMNOVA), and SH-8400 (manufactured by Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.).
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0120~段落0125に記載の界面活性剤を用いることができる。
 また、界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-552又はF-554(以上、DIC(株)製)を用いることができる。
 その他、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も用いることができる。
As the surfactant, for example, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used.
As a commercially available product of the surfactant, for example, Megafac F-552 or F-554 (above, manufactured by DIC Corporation) can be used.
In addition, the surfactants described in Paragraph 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and Paragraph 0060 to Paragraph 0071 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-237362 can be used.
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層は、界面活性剤を、1種単独で含んでいてもよいし、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。
 界面活性剤の含有量は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~10質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~3質量%であることが更に好ましい。
The positive photosensitive resin layer may contain one type of surfactant alone, or may contain two or more types of surfactant.
The content of the surfactant is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 10% by mass, and 0.01% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer. More preferably, it is from 3% by mass to 3% by mass.
 また、本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層には、その他の添加剤として、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤などの公知の添加剤を更に加えることができる。
 これらの成分の好ましい態様については、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Further, in the positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure, as other additives, metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid proliferating agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, colorants, thermal radical polymerization. Known additives such as an initiator, a thermal acid generator, an ultraviolet absorber, a thickener, a cross-linking agent, and an organic or inorganic suspending agent can be further added.
Preferred embodiments of these components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
 更に、本開示に係る転写材料におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層は、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。溶剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物によりポジ型感光性樹脂層を形成した場合、溶剤が残留することもある。
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、5質量%以下であることが好ましく、2質量%以下であることがより好ましく、1質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。
Further, the positive photosensitive resin layer in the transfer material according to the present disclosure may contain a solvent. When the positive photosensitive resin layer is formed from the photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent, the solvent may remain.
The content of the solvent in the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, and 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. More preferably.
<<ポジ型感光性樹脂層の平均厚さ>>
 ポジ型感光性樹脂層の平均厚さは、0.5μm~20μmが好ましい。ポジ型感光性樹脂層の平均厚さが20μm以下であるとパターンの解像度がより優れ、0.5μm以上であるとパターン直線性の観点から好ましい。
 また、ポジ型感光性樹脂層の平均厚さとしては、0.8μm~15μmがより好ましく、1.0μm~10μmが特に好ましい。
<< Average Thickness of Positive Photosensitive Resin Layer >>
The average thickness of the positive photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 μm to 20 μm. When the average thickness of the positive photosensitive resin layer is 20 μm or less, the pattern resolution is more excellent, and when it is 0.5 μm or more, it is preferable from the viewpoint of pattern linearity.
The average thickness of the positive photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 μm to 15 μm, particularly preferably 1.0 μm to 10 μm.
<<ポジ型感光性樹脂層の形成方法>>
 本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を形成するのに必要な成分、及び、溶剤を含有する感光性樹脂組成物を調整し、塗布及び乾燥して形成することができる。具体的には、各成分、及び、溶剤を任意の割合でかつ任意の方法で混合し、撹拌溶解してポジ型感光性樹脂層を形成するための感光性樹脂組成物を調製することができる。例えば、各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、例えば、孔径0.2μm~30μmのフィルター等を用いてろ過を行ってもよい。
<< Method of forming positive photosensitive resin layer >>
The positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure may be formed by adjusting, coating and drying a photosensitive resin composition containing components necessary for forming the positive photosensitive resin layer and a solvent. it can. Specifically, each component and a solvent are mixed at an arbitrary ratio and in an arbitrary method, and dissolved by stirring to prepare a photosensitive resin composition for forming a positive photosensitive resin layer. . For example, it is possible to prepare a composition by dissolving each component in advance in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solutions at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above may be filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 μm to 30 μm.
 感光性樹脂組成物を仮支持体又はカバーフィルム上に塗布し、乾燥させることで、本開示におけるポジ型感光性樹脂層を形成することができる。
 塗布方法は特に限定されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、インクジェット塗布などの公知の方法で塗布することができる。
 また、仮支持体又はカバーフィルム上に後述のその他の層を形成した上に、感光性樹脂層を形成することもできる。
The positive photosensitive resin layer in the present disclosure can be formed by applying the photosensitive resin composition on a temporary support or a cover film and drying it.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and it can be coated by a known method such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating and the like.
Further, the photosensitive resin layer can be formed on the temporary support or the cover film on which other layers described below are formed.
〔感光性樹脂組成物〕
 感光性樹脂組成物は、ポジ型感光性樹脂層に含まれる成分、及び、溶剤を含むことが好ましい。各成分に溶剤を含有させて粘度を調節し、塗布及び乾燥することで、感光性樹脂層を好適に形成することができる。 
[Photosensitive resin composition]
The photosensitive resin composition preferably contains a component contained in the positive photosensitive resin layer and a solvent. A photosensitive resin layer can be preferably formed by incorporating a solvent into each component to adjust the viscosity, and applying and drying.
-溶剤-
 溶剤としては、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-ブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールメチル-n-プロピルエーテル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールメチルエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルプロピオネート、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールジエチエルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、ジプロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル、及び、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート等の公知の溶媒、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0092~段落0094に記載された溶剤が挙げられる。
-solvent-
Examples of the solvent include propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol methyl-n-butyl ether, propylene glycol methyl-n-propyl ether, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, diethylene glycol methyl ethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether. Propionate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, 3-methoxybutyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol diacetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether, and 1,3-butylene glycol diester Known solvents such as acetate and the solvents described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be mentioned.
 また、溶剤としては、20℃における蒸気圧が1kPa以上16kPa以下の溶剤、又は、これらの混合物を含むことが好ましい。20℃における蒸気圧が1kPa以上16kPa以下の溶剤としては、酢酸エチル、酢酸プロピル、酢酸イソプロピル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸ブチル、酢酸tert-ブチル、シクロペンチルメチルエーテル、ジイソプロピルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルn-ブチルケトン、メチルエチルケトン、メチルイソブチルケトン、メチルn-プロピルケトン、メチルイソプロピルケトン、トルエン、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)、シクロヘキサノン、1,2-プロパンジオールジアセタート、1,3-ブタンジオールジアセテート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアセタート、トリアセチン、ジプロピレングリコール-n-ブチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート等が好適に挙げられる。
 本開示に用いることができる溶剤は、1種単独で用いてもよく、2種を併用してもよい。
Further, the solvent preferably contains a solvent having a vapor pressure at 20 ° C. of 1 kPa or more and 16 kPa or less, or a mixture thereof. Solvents having a vapor pressure at 20 ° C. of 1 kPa or more and 16 kPa or less include ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl acetate, tert-butyl acetate, cyclopentyl methyl ether, diisopropyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl n. -Butyl ketone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methyl n-propyl ketone, methyl isopropyl ketone, toluene, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA), propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME), cyclohexanone, 1,2-propanediol diacetate, Preferable examples include 1,3-butanediol diacetate, 1,6-hexanediol diacetate, triacetin, dipropylene glycol-n-butyl ether, and diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate.
The solvent that can be used in the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two.
 感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部に対し、50質量部~1,900質量部であることが好ましく、100質量部~900質量部であることがより好ましい。 The content of the solvent at the time of applying the photosensitive resin composition is preferably 50 parts by mass to 1,900 parts by mass, and 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. It is more preferably from about 900 parts by mass.
<仮支持体>
 本開示に係る転写材料は、仮支持体を有する。
 仮支持体は、中間層及び感光性樹脂層を支持し、剥離可能な支持体である。
 本開示に用いられる仮支持体は、中間層及び感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する場合において、仮支持体を介して中間層及び感光性樹脂層を露光し得る観点から光透過性を有することが好ましい。
 光透過性を有するとは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味し、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度向上の観点から、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。
 仮支持体としては、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが特に好ましい。
<Temporary support>
The transfer material according to the present disclosure has a temporary support.
The temporary support is a support that supports the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off.
The temporary support used in the present disclosure may have light transmittance from the viewpoint of exposing the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer through the temporary support when the intermediate layer and the photosensitive resin layer are subjected to pattern exposure. preferable.
Having light transmittance means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more, and the transmittance of the main wavelength of the light used for pattern exposure is from the viewpoint of improving the exposure sensitivity. Therefore, 60% or more is preferable, and 70% or more is more preferable. As a method of measuring the transmittance, there is a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
Examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper and the like, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film and the like. Of these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is particularly preferable.
 仮支持体の平均厚さは、特に限定されず、5μm~200μmの範囲が好ましく、取扱い易さ、汎用性などの点で、10μm~150μmの範囲がより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚さは、支持体としての強度、回路配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性などの観点から、材質に応じて選択すればよい。
The average thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 5 μm to 200 μm, more preferably in the range of 10 μm to 150 μm from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support depends on the material, from the viewpoint of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding with a circuit wiring forming substrate, and light transmission required in the first exposure step. Just select it.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様については、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018に記載があり、この公報の内容は本開示に組み込まれる。 Preferred embodiments of the temporary support are described, for example, in paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP-A-2014-85643, the contents of which are incorporated into the present disclosure.
<カバーフィルム>
 本開示に係る転写材料は、転写材料における仮支持体が設けられた側の面とは反対側の面に、カバーフィルムを有することが好ましい。
 カバーフィルムとしては、樹脂フィルム、紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等の観点から、樹脂フィルムが特に好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。中でも、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。
<Cover film>
The transfer material according to the present disclosure preferably has a cover film on the surface of the transfer material opposite to the surface on which the temporary support is provided.
Examples of the cover film include a resin film and paper, and a resin film is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of strength and flexibility. Examples of the resin film include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film and polycarbonate film. Among them, polyethylene film, polypropylene film and polyethylene terephthalate film are preferable.
 カバーフィルムの平均厚さは特に限定されず、例えば、1μm~2mmのものが好ましく挙げられる。 The average thickness of the cover film is not particularly limited, and for example, one having a thickness of 1 μm to 2 mm is preferable.
<その他の層>
 本開示に係る転写材料は、上述した以外の層(以下、「その他の層」ともいう。)を有していてもよい。その他の層としては、コントラストエンハンスメント層、熱可塑性樹脂層等を挙げることができる。
 コントラストエンハンスメント層の好ましい態様については国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0134、熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0189~段落0193、及び、更に他の層の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0194~段落0196にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Other layers>
The transfer material according to the present disclosure may have a layer other than those described above (hereinafter, also referred to as “other layer”). Examples of other layers include a contrast enhancement layer and a thermoplastic resin layer.
A preferred embodiment of the contrast enhancement layer is paragraph 0134 of International Publication No. 2018/179640, a preferred embodiment of the thermoplastic resin layer is paragraph 0189 to paragraph 0193 of JP-A-2014-85643, and further preferred are other layers. Aspects are described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP-A-2014-85643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein.
 ここで図1を参照して、本開示に係る転写材料の層構成の一例を概略的に示す。
 図1に示す転写材料100は、仮支持体10と、中間層12と、感光性樹脂層14と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層されている。
Here, referring to FIG. 1, an example of a layer configuration of a transfer material according to the present disclosure is schematically illustrated.
In the transfer material 100 shown in FIG. 1, a temporary support 10, an intermediate layer 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
(樹脂パターンの製造方法、及び、回路配線の製造方法)
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法は、本開示に係る転写材料を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(以下、「貼り合わせ工程」ということがある。)と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(以下、「露光工程」ということがある。)と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(以下、「現像工程」ということがある。)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法における上記基板は、導電層を有する基板であることが好ましく、表面に導電層を有する基板であることがより好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る転写材料を用いた回路配線の製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、本開示に係る転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程と、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程(以下、「エッチング工程」ということがある。)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法における上記基板は、表面に上記導電層を有する基板であることが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、及び、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記基板に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記パターンを形成する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことが好ましい。
(Resin pattern manufacturing method and circuit wiring manufacturing method)
The method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a resin pattern using the transfer material according to the present disclosure. However, it is photosensitive to the temporary support in the transfer material according to the present disclosure. Of the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer to the substrate for bonding (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “bonding step”) and pattern exposing the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, “exposure step”). ") And a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as" developing step ").
Further, the substrate in the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on its surface.
Further, the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for producing a circuit wiring using the transfer material according to the present disclosure, but is not limited to the temporary support in the transfer material according to the present disclosure. A step of bringing the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer into contact with the substrate having the conductive layer and adhering the same, a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer, and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer. It is preferable to include a step of forming a pattern and a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not arranged (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “etching step”) in this order.
Further, the substrate in the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having the conductive layer on its surface.
In addition, a method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, and a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure include a method of forming the temporary support after the step of bonding to the substrate and before the step of forming the pattern. It is preferable to include a step of peeling.
 上記感光性樹脂層は、活性光線を照射していない部分を像として残すポジ型である。ポジ型感光性樹脂層では、活性光線を照射することにより、例えば活性光線を照射されて酸を発生する感光剤などを用いて露光部の溶解性を高めるため、パターン露光時点では露光部及び未露光部がいずれも硬化せず、得られたパターン形状が不良であった場合には全面露光などによって基板を再利用(リワーク)できる。また、残存した感光性樹脂層を再度露光して異なるパターンを作製する、という技術はポジ型感光性樹脂層でなければ実現できないため、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法において、露光を2回以上行う態様が好ましく挙げられる。 The above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer is of a positive type, which leaves as an image the portion not irradiated with actinic rays. In the positive type photosensitive resin layer, by irradiating with actinic rays, for example, the solubility of the exposed areas is increased by using, for example, a photosensitizer which generates acid upon irradiation with the active rays. If none of the exposed parts are cured and the obtained pattern shape is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by exposing the entire surface. Further, since the technique of exposing the remaining photosensitive resin layer again to form a different pattern can be realized only by the positive type photosensitive resin layer, the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or the present disclosure. In the method of manufacturing the circuit wiring, a mode in which the exposure is performed twice or more is preferably mentioned.
 露光を2回以上行う態様としては、以下に示す態様が挙げられる。
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、及び、上記エッチング工程の4工程を1セットとして、複数回繰り返す態様が好ましく挙げられる。
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、及び、上記エッチング工程の4工程を行った後、上記パターンに対して上記露光工程を更に行い、続いて上記現像工程、及び、上記エッチング工程を更に行う態様が好ましく挙げられる。
Examples of the mode in which the exposure is performed twice or more include the modes described below.
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a mode in which four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step are set as one set and repeated a plurality of times.
In the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, after performing the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step, the exposure step is further performed on the pattern. A preferred mode is one in which the developing step and the etching step are subsequently performed.
<貼り合わせ工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、基板、好ましくは導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、上記貼り合わせ工程においては、上記導電層と、本開示に係る転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層と、が接触するように圧着させることが好ましい。上記態様であると、露光及び現像後のパターン形成された感光性樹脂層を、導電層をエッチングする際のエッチングレジストとして好適に用いることができる。
 上記基板と上記転写材料とを圧着する方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の転写方法、及び、ラミネート方法を用いることができる。
 具体的には例えば、上記転写材料における上記仮支持体に対して感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層側を基板の上に重ね、ロール等による加圧、又は、加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、ラミネータ、真空ラミネータ、及び、より生産性を高めることができるオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネータを使用することができる。
 上記貼り合わせ工程における圧着圧力及び温度は、特に制限はなく、貼り合せる基板の表面の材質、例えば、導電層の材質、上記最外層の材質、搬送速度、並びに、使用する圧着機等に応じ、適宜設定することができる。また、転写材料がカバーフィルムを有する場合は、カバーフィルムを除去した後、圧着すればよい。
 上記基材が樹脂フィルムである場合、ロールツーロールでの圧着を行ってもよい。
<Laminating process>
A method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or a method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, wherein the outermost layer having a photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to the present disclosure is a substrate It is preferable to include a step (bonding step) of bringing the substrate having a conductive layer into contact therewith.
Further, in the bonding step, it is preferable that the conductive layer and the outermost layer on the side having the photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to the present disclosure are pressure-bonded to each other. . In the above aspect, the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when etching the conductive layer.
The method for press-bonding the substrate and the transfer material is not particularly limited, and known transfer methods and laminating methods can be used.
Specifically, for example, the outermost layer side having the photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material is overlaid on a substrate, and pressure is applied by a roll, or pressure and heat are applied. It is preferably carried out. For laminating, a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator capable of improving productivity can be used.
The pressure and temperature of the bonding step in the bonding step are not particularly limited, depending on the material of the surface of the substrate to be bonded, for example, the material of the conductive layer, the material of the outermost layer, the transport speed, and the pressure bonding machine to be used. It can be set appropriately. When the transfer material has a cover film, the cover film may be removed and then pressure-bonded.
When the base material is a resin film, roll-to-roll pressure bonding may be performed.
 本開示に用いられる基板は、導電層を有する基板であることが好ましく、基材の表面に導電層を有する基板であることがより好ましい。導電層をパターニングすることで配線を形成する。また、本開示においては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートなどのフィルム基材に金属酸化物や金属などの複数の導電層が設けられたものであることが好ましい。
 また、本開示に用いられる基板は、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、銅を含む基板であることが好ましい。また、本開示における効果をより発揮する観点から、上記導電層は、銅を含む層であることが好ましい。
The substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate having a conductive layer, and more preferably a substrate having a conductive layer on the surface of a base material. Wiring is formed by patterning the conductive layer. Further, in the present disclosure, a film base material such as polyethylene terephthalate is preferably provided with a plurality of conductive layers such as metal oxides and metals.
In addition, the substrate used in the present disclosure is preferably a substrate containing copper from the viewpoint of exerting the effect in the present disclosure more. Further, from the viewpoint of more exerting the effect in the present disclosure, the conductive layer is preferably a layer containing copper.
 また、上記基板は、支持体上に複数の導電層が積層された基板であることが好ましい。
 支持体上に複数の導電層が積層された基板は、支持体がガラス基材又はフィルム基材であることが好ましく、フィルム基材であることがより好ましい。本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、タッチパネル用回路配線である場合、支持体がシート状樹脂組成物であることが特に好ましい。
 また、支持体は透明であることが好ましい。
 支持体の屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 支持体は、ガラス基材等の透光性基材で構成されていてもよく、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラスなどを用いることができる。また、上述の透明基材としては、特開2010-86684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料を好ましく用いることができる。
 基材としてフィルム基材を用いる場合は、光学的に歪みがない基材、及び、透明度が高い基材を用いることがより好ましく、具体的な素材には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(polyethylene terephthalate;PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、シクロオレフィンポリマーをあげることができる。
Further, the substrate is preferably a substrate in which a plurality of conductive layers are laminated on a support.
In the substrate in which a plurality of conductive layers are laminated on the support, the support is preferably a glass base material or a film base material, and more preferably a film base material. In the method of manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, in the case of touch panel circuit wiring, it is particularly preferable that the support is a sheet-shaped resin composition.
Further, the support is preferably transparent.
The refractive index of the support is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The support may be composed of a translucent base material such as a glass base material, and a tempered glass typified by Gorilla glass manufactured by Corning Incorporated can be used. Further, as the above-mentioned transparent substrate, the materials used in JP 2010-86684 A, JP 2010-152809 A and JP 2010-257492 A can be preferably used.
When a film base material is used as the base material, it is more preferable to use a base material having no optical distortion and a base material having high transparency, and specific materials include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), Examples thereof include polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose and cycloolefin polymer.
 上記導電層としては、一般的な配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層を挙げることができる。
 導電層の材料としては、金属及び金属酸化物などを挙げることができる。
 金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、SiO等を挙げることができる。金属としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo等を挙げることができる。
The conductive layer may be any conductive layer used for general wiring or touch panel wiring.
Examples of the material of the conductive layer include metals and metal oxides.
Examples of the metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), and SiO 2 . Examples of the metal include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr and Mo.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層が金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
In the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, it is preferable that at least one conductive layer of the plurality of conductive layers contains a metal oxide.
The conductive layer is preferably an electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition part used in the capacitive touch panel or a wiring of the peripheral extraction part.
<露光工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせる工程後、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記露光工程では、上記感光性樹脂層を、所定のパターンを有するマスクを介して、活性光線を照射することが好ましい。この工程では、光酸発生剤が分解し酸が発生する。発生した酸の触媒作用により、感光性樹脂層中に含まれる酸分解性基が加水分解されて、酸基、例えば、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性水酸基が生成する。
 本開示において、パターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは、特に限定されない。本開示において製造される回路基板を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えば、タッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくしたいことから、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は、100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下の細線であることがより好ましい。
 また、上記露光工程における露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよいが、露光用マスクを介した露光であることが好ましい。
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程と上記露光工程との間に、上記転写材料と露光用マスクとを接触させる工程を含むことが好ましい。上記態様であると、得られるパターンの解像度により優れる。
<Exposure process>
The method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step (exposure step) of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer after the attaching step.
In the exposure step, it is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer is irradiated with an actinic ray through a mask having a predetermined pattern. In this step, the photo-acid generator decomposes to generate an acid. By the catalytic action of the generated acid, the acid-decomposable group contained in the photosensitive resin layer is hydrolyzed to generate an acid group such as a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group.
In the present disclosure, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. In order to improve the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) provided with an input device having a circuit board manufactured according to the present disclosure, and to make the area occupied by the extraction wiring as small as possible, at least a part of the pattern (particularly the touch panel). The electrode pattern and the lead-out wiring) are preferably 100 μm or less, and more preferably 70 μm or less.
Further, the exposure in the exposure step may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like, but exposure through a mask for exposure is preferable.
The method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of bringing the transfer material into contact with an exposure mask between the bonding step and the exposure step. It is preferable. In the above aspect, the resolution of the obtained pattern is more excellent.
 活性光線としては、可視光線、紫外線、及び、電子線が挙げられるが、可視光線又は紫外線が好ましく、紫外線が特に好ましい。
 活性光線による露光光源としては、低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、超高圧水銀灯、ケミカルランプ、発光ダイオード(LED)光源、エキシマレーザー発生装置などを用いることができ、g線(436nm)、i線(365nm)、h線(405nm)などの波長300nm以上450nm以下の波長を有する活性光線が好ましく使用できる。また、必要に応じて長波長カットフィルター、短波長カットフィルター、バンドパスフィルターのような分光フィルターを通して照射光を調整することもできる。
 露光装置としては、ミラープロジェクションアライナー、ステッパー、スキャナー、プロキシミティ、コンタクト、マイクロレンズアレイ、レーザー露光など各種方式の露光機を用いることができる。
 露光量は、使用する感光性樹脂層に応じ、適宜選択すればよいが、5mJ/cm~200mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~100mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。
 また、露光後にパターンの矩形性、直線性を向上させる目的で、現像前に熱処理を行うことも好ましい。いわゆるPEB(Post Exposure Bake)と呼ばれる工程により、露光時に感光性樹脂層中で生じた定在波によるパターンエッジの荒れを低減することが可能である。
Examples of the actinic rays include visible rays, ultraviolet rays, and electron rays. Visible rays or ultraviolet rays are preferable, and ultraviolet rays are particularly preferable.
As an exposure light source for actinic rays, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp, a chemical lamp, a light-emitting diode (LED) light source, an excimer laser generator, etc. can be used, and g-line (436 nm), i-line (365 nm) , Actinic rays having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and 450 nm or less such as h-line (405 nm) can be preferably used. Irradiation light can be adjusted through a spectral filter such as a long wavelength cut filter, a short wavelength cut filter, and a bandpass filter, if necessary.
As the exposure device, various types of exposure devices such as a mirror projection aligner, a stepper, a scanner, a proximity, a contact, a microlens array, and a laser exposure can be used.
Exposure dose, depending on the photosensitive resin layer to be used may be appropriately selected, but is preferably from 5mJ / cm 2 ~ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ~ 100mJ / cm 2 .
Further, it is also preferable to perform heat treatment before development for the purpose of improving the rectangularity and linearity of the pattern after exposure. By a process called so-called PEB (Post Exposure Bake), it is possible to reduce the roughness of the pattern edge due to the standing wave generated in the photosensitive resin layer at the time of exposure.
 なお、パターン露光は、仮支持体を感光性樹脂層から剥離してから行っても、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介して露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたデジタル露光でもよい。 Even if the pattern exposure is performed after peeling the temporary support from the photosensitive resin layer, before the peeling of the temporary support, the pattern support is exposed through the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off. Good. The pattern exposure may be exposure through a mask or digital exposure using a laser or the like.
<現像工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記露光する工程後、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(現像工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、上記転写材料が中間層を有する場合、現像工程においては、露光された部分の中間層も、露光された感光性樹脂層とともに除去される。更に、現像工程においては、未露光部の中間層も現像液に溶解あるいは分散する形で除去されてもよい。
 上記現像工程における露光された上記感光性樹脂層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、上記感光性樹脂層の露光部分を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-72724号公報に記載の現像液など、公知の現像液を使用することができる。なお、現像液は上記感光性樹脂層の露光部分が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。現像液としては、アルカリ水溶液が好ましく、例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05mol/L(リットル)~5mol/Lの濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液がより好ましい。現像液は、更に、水と混和性を有する有機溶剤、界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。本開示において好適に用いられる現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
<Developing process>
In the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, after the exposing step, a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern (developing step) It is preferable to include
When the transfer material has an intermediate layer, in the developing step, the exposed intermediate layer is also removed together with the exposed photosensitive resin layer. Further, in the developing step, the intermediate layer in the unexposed area may be removed in a form of being dissolved or dispersed in the developing solution.
Development of the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the developing step can be performed using a developer.
The developer is not particularly limited as long as it can remove the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer, and a known developer such as the developer described in JP-A-5-72724 can be used. . The developing solution is preferably a developing solution in which the exposed portion of the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type developing behavior. As the developing solution, an alkaline aqueous solution is preferable, and for example, an alkaline aqueous solution containing a compound having pKa of 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 mol / L (liter) to 5 mol / L is more preferable. The developer may further contain an organic solvent miscible with water, a surfactant and the like. Examples of the developer preferably used in the present disclosure include the developers described in paragraph 0194 of WO 2015/093271.
 現像方式としては、特に制限はなくパドル現像、シャワー現像、シャワー及びスピン現像、ディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後の感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去することができる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤などをシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシなどで擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することが好ましい。現像液の液温度は20℃~40℃が好ましい。
 また、露光から現像までの時間が長い態様であるほうが、本開示におけるパターン形状の変形を抑制する効果がより発揮される。露光後すぐ現像してもよいが、露光から現像までの時間が、露光から、好ましくは0.5時間以上、より好ましくは1時間以上、更に好ましく6時間以上経過した後、現像を行う態様において、本開示におけるパターン形状の変形を抑制する効果がより発揮される。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、現像後、水等により洗浄する工程や、得られたパターンを有する基板を乾燥する工程等、公知の工程を含んでいてもよい。
The developing system is not particularly limited, and may be paddle development, shower development, shower and spin development, dip development or the like. Explaining shower development here, the exposed portion can be removed by spraying a developing solution onto the photosensitive resin layer after exposure with a shower. Further, after development, it is preferable to remove a development residue while spraying a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rubbing with a brush or the like. The liquid temperature of the developer is preferably 20 ° C to 40 ° C.
Further, the longer the time from exposure to development is, the more the effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape in the present disclosure is exhibited. Development may be carried out immediately after exposure, but the time from exposure to development is preferably 0.5 hours or more, more preferably 1 hour or more, still more preferably 6 hours or more, after which the development is carried out. The effect of suppressing the deformation of the pattern shape according to the present disclosure is more exerted.
In addition, the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, such as a step of washing with water or the like after development, a step of drying the substrate having the obtained pattern, etc. May be included.
 更に、現像して得られたパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークの加熱は8.1kPa~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、50.66kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、111.46kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80℃~250℃であることが好ましく、110℃~170℃であることがより好ましく、130℃~150℃であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1分間~30分間であることが好ましく、2分間~10分間であることがより好ましく、2分間~4分間であることが特に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
Further, it may have a post-baking step of heating the pattern obtained by development.
The post-baking heating is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 kPa to 121.6 kPa, more preferably 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferably performed in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and particularly preferably in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The post-baking temperature is preferably 80 ° C. to 250 ° C., more preferably 110 ° C. to 170 ° C., and particularly preferably 130 ° C. to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 minute to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 minutes to 10 minutes, and particularly preferably 2 minutes to 4 minutes.
Post bake may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法における各工程時における上記支持体の搬送速度は、特に制限はないが、露光時を除いて、0.5m/min~10m/minであることが好ましく、露光時を除いて、2.0m/min~8.0m/minであることがより好ましい。 The transport speed of the support at each step in the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited, but 0.5 m / It is preferably from min to 10 m / min, and more preferably from 2.0 m / min to 8.0 m / min except during exposure.
<仮支持体剥離工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記基板に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記パターンを形成する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程(仮支持体剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記転写材料を用いるため、転写材料を貼り合わせた後、かつ現像前のどのタイミングで仮支持体を剥離しても、感光性樹脂層との密着性に優れるため、一部剥がれ等の不良原因が生じることが抑制され、パターン形成を良好に行うことができる。
 また、本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、パターン形成性及び解像度の観点から、上記基板に貼り合わせる工程の後、かつ上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程を含むことがより好ましい。更に、上記態様であると、マスクを接触させてパターン露光する場合に、感光性樹脂層とマスクとが直接触れないため、パターン形成性及び解像度により優れる。
 上記剥離工程における仮支持体を剥離する方法は、特に制限はなく、公知の方法により剥離すればよい。
<Temporary support peeling process>
A method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or a method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, peels the temporary support after a step of bonding to the substrate and before a step of forming the pattern. It is preferable to include a step (temporary support peeling step).
The method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure uses the above transfer material, and therefore the temporary support is peeled off after the transfer material is bonded and at any timing before development. However, since the adhesiveness to the photosensitive resin layer is excellent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defective factors such as partial peeling, and it is possible to perform good pattern formation.
Further, the method for producing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure, or the method for producing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, from the viewpoint of pattern formability and resolution, after the step of bonding to the substrate, and the photosensitive resin layer It is more preferable to include a step of peeling the temporary support before the step of pattern exposure. Further, in the above aspect, when the mask is brought into contact with the substrate for pattern exposure, the photosensitive resin layer and the mask do not come into direct contact with each other, and therefore the pattern formability and the resolution are superior.
The method of peeling the temporary support in the peeling step is not particularly limited and may be a known method.
<カバーフィルム剥離工程>
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、本開示に係る転写材料がカバーフィルムを有する場合、上記転写材料のカバーフィルムを剥離する工程(「カバーフィルム剥離工程」ということがある。)を含むことが好ましい。カバーフィルムを剥離する方法は、制限されず、公知の方法を適用することができる。
<Cover film peeling process>
When the transfer material according to the present disclosure has a cover film, the method of manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method of manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of peeling the cover film of the transfer material (“cover film”). It may be referred to as a "peeling step"). The method of peeling off the cover film is not limited, and a known method can be applied.
<エッチング工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程では、上記現像工程により上記感光性樹脂層から形成されたパターンを、エッチングレジストとして使用し、上記導電層のエッチング処理を行う。
 上記導電層のエッチングは、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載の方法、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法など、公知の方法でエッチングを適用することができる。
 例えば、エッチングの方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、硝酸、酢酸、フッ酸、シュウ酸、又は、リン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、酸性成分と塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、又は、過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、又は、テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイドのような有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩の混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
<Etching process>
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in a region where the pattern is not arranged.
In the etching step, the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer in the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
As the etching of the conductive layer, etching can be applied by a known method such as the method described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP 2010-152155 A, a method by dry etching such as a known plasma etching, or the like.
For example, as an etching method, a generally used wet etching method of immersing in an etching solution can be mentioned. As the etching solution used for wet etching, an acidic type or alkaline type etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the object of etching.
The acidic type etching solution includes hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid, or an aqueous solution containing only an acidic component such as phosphoric acid, an acidic component and ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or permanganese. Examples include mixed aqueous solutions of salts such as potassium acid. As the acidic component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of acidic components may be used.
As the alkaline type etching solution, an aqueous solution containing only an alkali component such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, or a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, an alkali component and potassium permanganate. Examples include mixed aqueous solutions of salts such as. As the alkaline component, a component obtained by combining a plurality of alkaline components may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に限定されないが、45℃以下であることが好ましい。本開示において、エッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用されるパターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中に上記パターンが剥離することが防止され、上記パターンの存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。 The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 45 ° C or lower. In the present disclosure, the pattern used as the etching mask (etching pattern) preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in the temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. Therefore, the pattern is prevented from peeling during the etching process, and the portion where the pattern does not exist is selectively etched.
 上記エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて、エッチングされた上記基板を洗浄する工程(洗浄工程)、及び、エッチングされた上記基板を乾燥する工程(乾燥工程)を行ってもよい。洗浄工程については、例えば常温(10℃~35℃)で純水により10秒~300秒間基板を洗浄することが挙げられる。乾燥工程については、例えばエアブローを使用し、エアブロー圧(0.1kg/cm~5kg/cm程度)を適宜調整して乾燥を行えばよい。 After the etching step, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a step of cleaning the etched substrate (washing step) and a step of drying the etched substrate (drying step) are performed as necessary. Good. Examples of the cleaning step include cleaning the substrate with pure water at room temperature (10 ° C. to 35 ° C.) for 10 seconds to 300 seconds. In the drying step, for example, air blow may be used, and the air blow pressure (about 0.1 kg / cm 2 to 5 kg / cm 2 ) may be appropriately adjusted to perform the drying.
<エッチングレジスト剥離工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記エッチング工程の後に、上記感光性樹脂層を剥離液を用いて剥離する工程(エッチングレジスト剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記エッチング工程の終了後、パターン形成された上記感光性樹脂層が残存している。上記感光性樹脂層が不要であれば、残存する全ての上記感光性樹脂層を除去すればよい。
 剥離液を用いて剥離する方法としては、例えば、好ましくは30℃~80℃、より好ましくは50℃~80℃にて撹拌中の剥離液に上記感光性樹脂層などを有する基材を5分~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
 剥離液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム若しくは水酸化カリウム等の無機アルカリ成分、又は、第三級アミン若しくは第四級アンモニウム塩等の有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、又は、これらの混合溶液に溶解させた剥離液が挙げられる。剥離液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、又は、パドル法等により剥離してもよい。
<Etching resist stripping process>
It is preferable that the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure includes a step of removing the photosensitive resin layer with a release solution (etching resist removing step) after the etching step.
After the completion of the etching step, the patterned photosensitive resin layer remains. If the photosensitive resin layer is unnecessary, all the remaining photosensitive resin layer may be removed.
As a method of peeling using a peeling solution, for example, a substrate having the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer or the like in the peeling solution is stirred for 5 minutes at preferably 30 ° C. to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 ° C. to 80 ° C. Examples include a method of soaking for about 30 minutes.
As the stripping solution, for example, an inorganic alkali component such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide, or an organic alkali component such as a tertiary amine or a quaternary ammonium salt, water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or A stripping solution dissolved in these mixed solutions can be used. A stripping solution may be used and stripping may be performed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method, or the like.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、必要に応じ、露光工程、現像工程及びエッチング工程を2回以上繰り返してもよい。
 本開示における露光工程、現像工程及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-23696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法を、本開示においても好適に用いることができる。
Further, in the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure, the exposure step, the development step, and the etching step may be repeated twice or more as necessary.
As examples of the exposure step, the development step, and other steps in the present disclosure, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-23696 can be preferably used in the present disclosure.
~ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全面露光~
 本開示に係る転写材料における感光性樹脂層が、ポジ型感光性樹脂層である場合、本開示の回路配線の製造方法は、上記エッチング工程後に、上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を全面露光する工程(以下、「全面露光工程」ということがある。)と、上記全面露光されたポジ型感光性樹脂層を除去する工程と、を含むことが好ましい。
 従来の回路配線の製造方法においては、エッチングマスクの除去液を長時間使用した場合、徐々にエッチングマスクの除去性が低下することがある。エッチング工程の後に、エッチングマスクとして使用したポジ型感光性樹脂層を全面露光することにより、除去液への溶解性及び除去液の浸透性が向上し、除去液を長時間使用した場合においても除去性に優れる。
 また、基材と、互いに構成材料が異なる第1導電層及び第2導電層を含む複数の導電層と、を有する基板に対し、上記回路配線の製造方法を繰り返し適用して回路配線を製造することもできる。
 上記全面露光されたポジ型感光性樹脂層を剥離する工程は、上記エッチングレジスト剥離工程と同様の方法により行うことができる。
-Overall exposure of positive photosensitive resin layer-
When the photosensitive resin layer in the transfer material according to the present disclosure is a positive type photosensitive resin layer, the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of exposing the entire surface of the positive type photosensitive resin layer after the etching step. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "entire surface exposure step".) And a step of removing the positively exposed photosensitive resin layer that has been entirely exposed.
In the conventional circuit wiring manufacturing method, when the etching mask removing solution is used for a long time, the etching mask removing property may gradually decrease. After the etching process, by exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer used as the etching mask to the entire surface, the solubility in the removal liquid and the permeability of the removal liquid are improved, and the removal liquid is removed even when used for a long time. Excellent in performance.
Further, a circuit wiring is manufactured by repeatedly applying the circuit wiring manufacturing method to a substrate having a base material and a plurality of conductive layers including a first conductive layer and a second conductive layer that are different in constituent materials from each other. You can also
The step of removing the positive-type photosensitive resin layer exposed on the entire surface can be performed by the same method as the above-mentioned etching resist removing step.
<全面露光工程>
 全面露光工程においては、現像により残像するポジ型感光性樹脂層の全てを露光すればよく、ポジ型感光性樹脂層のない部分については、露光してもしなくてもよい。簡便性の観点から、例えば、基板の、ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の面の全面を露光することが好ましい。
<Overall exposure process>
In the whole surface exposure step, all of the positive photosensitive resin layer that causes an afterimage due to development may be exposed, and the portion without the positive photosensitive resin layer may or may not be exposed. From the viewpoint of simplicity, it is preferable to expose the entire surface of the substrate on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer, for example.
 全面露光工程における露光に使用する光源としては、特に制限はなく、公知の露光光源を用いることができる。除去性の観点から、上記露光工程と同じ波長の光を含む光源を用いることが好ましい。 The light source used for the exposure in the whole surface exposure process is not particularly limited, and a known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source containing light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
 全面露光工程における露光量としては、除去性の観点から、5mJ/cm~1,000mJ/cmであることが好ましく、10mJ/cm~800mJ/cmであることがより好ましく、100mJ/cm~500mJ/cmであることが特に好ましい。 The exposure amount in the overall exposure step, from the viewpoint of removability is preferably 5mJ / cm 2 ~ 1,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10mJ / cm 2 ~ 800mJ / cm 2, 100mJ / Particularly preferably, it is cm 2 to 500 mJ / cm 2 .
 全面露光工程における露光量としては、除去性の観点から、上記露光工程における露光量以上であることが好ましく、上記露光工程における露光量よりも多いことがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of removability, the exposure amount in the whole surface exposure process is preferably equal to or more than the exposure amount in the above exposure process, and more preferably more than the exposure amount in the above exposure process.
<加熱工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記全面露光工程中、露光工程後、又はその両方、かつ、後述する除去工程の前に、上記全面露光されたポジ型感光性樹脂層を加熱する工程(以下、「加熱工程」ということがある。)を含んでいてもよい。加熱工程を含むことにより、より光酸発生剤の反応速度、及び、発生した酸とポジ型感光性樹脂との反応速度を向上することができ、結果、除去性能が向上する。
<Heating process>
A method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of heating the above-described whole-surface-exposed positive photosensitive resin layer during the whole-surface exposure step, after the exposure step, or both, and before a removing step described later. (Hereinafter, it may be called a "heating process.") By including the heating step, the reaction rate of the photo-acid generator and the reaction rate of the generated acid and the positive photosensitive resin can be further improved, and as a result, the removal performance is improved.
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、他の任意の工程を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に限定されない。 The method for manufacturing a resin pattern according to the present disclosure or the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may include other arbitrary steps. For example, the following steps may be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to these steps.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、導電層の表面、例えば、基板上に有する導電層の一部又は全ての表面の可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含むことが可能である。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理などを挙げることができる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とすることで、黒化することにより、可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Process of reducing visible light reflectance>
The circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure can include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of the surface of the conductive layer, for example, part or all of the surface of the conductive layer on the substrate. ..
Examples of the treatment for lowering the visible light reflectance include oxidation treatment. For example, the visible light reflectance can be reduced by blackening by oxidizing copper to copper oxide.
For preferred embodiments of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance, see paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP-A-2014-150118 and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP-A-2013-206315. There is a description and the content of this publication is incorporated herein.
<エッチングされた上記基板上に絶縁膜を形成する工程、及び、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記基板上、例えば、形成した配線(エッチングされた導電層)上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程とを含むことも好ましい。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法を挙げることができる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Step of forming an insulating film on the etched substrate, and step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film>
A method of manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure includes a step of forming an insulating film on the substrate, for example, the formed wiring (etched conductive layer), and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. It is also preferable to include.
The step of forming the insulating film is not particularly limited, and a known method of forming a permanent film can be used. Alternatively, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
There is no particular limitation on the step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film. A new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、上記新たな導電層を、上記と同様な方法によりエッチングレジストを形成してエッチングしてもよいし、別途、公知の方法によりエッチングしてもよい。
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により得られる回路配線を有する基板は、上記基板上に1層のみの配線を有していても、2層以上の配線を有していてもよい。
In the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the new conductive layer may be etched by forming an etching resist by the same method as described above, or may be separately etched by a known method. .
The substrate having circuit wiring obtained by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure may have wiring of only one layer or wiring of two or more layers on the substrate.
 また、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、基板が両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有し、基板の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基板の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン(第一の配線)、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターン(第二の配線)を形成した配線、好ましくはタッチパネル用配線を形成することができる。 Further, in the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, the substrate may have a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces, and circuits may be sequentially or simultaneously formed on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the substrate. preferable. With such a configuration, a wiring in which a first conductive pattern (first wiring) is formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern (second wiring) is formed on the other surface, preferably a touch panel wiring Can be formed.
~ロールツーロール方式~
 本開示に係る樹脂パターンの製造方法、又は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法は、ロールツーロール方式により行われることが好ましい。
 ロールツーロール方式とは、基板として、巻き取り及び巻き出しが可能な基板を用い、回路配線の製造方法に含まれるいずれかの工程の前に、基板又は基板を含む構造体を巻き出す工程(以下、「巻き出し工程」ということがある。)と、いずれかの工程の後に、基材又は基板を含む構造体を巻き取る工程(以下、「巻き取り工程」ということがある。)と、を含み、少なくともいずれかの工程(好ましくは、全ての工程、又は加熱工程以外の全ての工程)を、基材又は基板を含む構造体を搬送しながら行う方式をいう。
 巻き出し工程における巻き出し方法、及び巻き取り工程における巻取り方法としては、特に制限されず、ロールツーロール方式を適用する製造方法において、公知の方法を用いればよい。
~ Roll to roll method ~
The resin pattern manufacturing method according to the present disclosure or the circuit wiring manufacturing method according to the present disclosure is preferably performed by a roll-to-roll method.
The roll-to-roll method uses a substrate that can be wound and unwound as a substrate, and unwinds the substrate or a structure including the substrate before any step included in the method for manufacturing circuit wiring ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "winding step"), and a step of winding a structure including a base material or a substrate after any one of the steps (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "winding step"). , And at least one of the steps (preferably all steps or all steps other than the heating step) is carried out while the structure including the base material or the substrate is carried.
The unwinding method in the unwinding step and the winding method in the winding step are not particularly limited, and known methods may be used in the manufacturing method to which the roll-to-roll method is applied.
 本開示に係る回路配線は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線である。
 本開示に係る回路配線を有する基板は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を有する基板である。
 本開示に係る回路配線を有する基板の用途は限定されないが、例えば、タッチパネル用回路配線基板であることが好ましい。
The circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
A substrate having circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is a substrate having circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
The application of the substrate having the circuit wiring according to the present disclosure is not limited, but it is preferably a circuit wiring board for a touch panel, for example.
 本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置として、入力装置が挙げられる。
 本開示に係る入力装置は、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を少なくとも有する入力装置であればよく、タッチパネルであることが好ましく、静電容量型タッチパネルであることがより好ましい。
 本開示に係る表示装置は、本開示に係る入力装置を備えることが好ましい。本開示に係る表示装置は、有機EL表示装置、及び、液晶表示装置等の画像表示装置であることが好ましい。
An input device is an example of a device including circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure.
The input device according to the present disclosure may be any input device that has at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure, and is preferably a touch panel, and more preferably a capacitive touch panel. preferable.
The display device according to the present disclosure preferably includes the input device according to the present disclosure. The display device according to the present disclosure is preferably an image display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
(タッチパネルの製造方法)
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、本開示に係る転写材料を用いたタッチパネルの製造方法であれば、特に制限はないが、上記転写材料の、上記仮支持体に対してポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に貼り合わせる工程(以下、「貼り合わせ工程」ということがある。)と、上記貼り合わせる工程後の上記転写材料の上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(以下、「露光工程」ということがある。)と、上記パターン露光する工程後の上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程(以下、「現像工程」ということがある。)と、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における基板をエッチング処理する工程(以下、「エッチング工程」ということがある。)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、貼り合わせ工程の後、かつ上記現像工程の前に、上記仮支持体を剥離する工程(仮支持体剥離工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 また、本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法は、貼り合わせ工程の前に、上記転写材料のカバーフィルムを剥離する工程(カバーフィルム剥離工程)を含んでいてもよい。
(Method for manufacturing touch panel)
The method for manufacturing a touch panel according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it is a method for manufacturing a touch panel using the transfer material according to the present disclosure, but a positive photosensitive resin of the transfer material with respect to the temporary support is used. A step of laminating the outermost layer on the side having a layer to a substrate having a conductive layer (hereinafter, also referred to as "laminating step"), and the positive photosensitive resin of the transfer material after the laminating step A step of pattern-exposing the layer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "exposure step"), and a step of developing the positive photosensitive resin layer after the step of pattern-exposing to form a resin pattern (hereinafter, "development" It may be referred to as “process”) and a process of etching the substrate in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged (hereinafter, may be referred to as “etching process”) in this order.
The touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure preferably includes a step of peeling the temporary support (temporary support peeling step) after the bonding step and before the developing step.
The touch panel manufacturing method according to the present disclosure may include a step of peeling the cover film of the transfer material (cover film peeling step) before the bonding step.
 本開示に係るタッチパネルの製造方法における、仮支持体剥離工程、貼り合わせ工程、露光工程、現像工程、エッチング工程及びカバーフィルム剥離工程の各工程の具体的な態様については、上述の「回路配線の製造方法」の項において説明したとおりであり、好ましい態様も同様である。 In the method for manufacturing a touch panel according to the present disclosure, the temporary support peeling step, the laminating step, the exposing step, the developing step, the etching step, and the cover film peeling step, specific aspects of each step, the above-mentioned "circuit wiring As described in the section of “Production method”, the preferred embodiment is also the same.
 本開示に係るタッチパネルは、本開示に係る回路配線の製造方法により製造された回路配線を少なくとも有するタッチパネルである。また、本開示に係るタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを少なくとも有することが好ましい。
 本開示に係るタッチパネルにおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び、光学方式など公知の方式いずれでもよい。中でも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-89102号公報の図1や図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-54727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)を挙げることができる。
 本開示に係るタッチパネルとしては、特開2017-120345号公報の段落0229に記載のものが挙げられる。
A touch panel according to the present disclosure is a touch panel including at least circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing circuit wiring according to the present disclosure. In addition, the touch panel according to the present disclosure preferably has at least a transparent substrate, an electrode, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The detection method in the touch panel according to the present disclosure may be any known method such as a resistance film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method. Of these, the capacitance method is preferable.
As the touch panel type, a so-called in-cell type (for example, those described in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of Japanese Patent Publication No. 2012-517051), a so-called on-cell type (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-168125). 19 of the publication, those shown in FIGS. 1 and 5 of JP 2012-89102 A, OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOL (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, JP 2 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-54727), other configurations (for example, the one shown in FIG. 6 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-164871), various out-cell types (so-called GG, G1, G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.).
Examples of the touch panel according to the present disclosure include those described in paragraph 0229 of JP-A-2017-120345.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明の実施形態を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び、処理手順等は、本発明の実施形態の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本発明の実施形態の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されない。なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」、「%」は質量基準である。 The embodiment of the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples. The materials, usage amounts, ratios, processing contents, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the embodiments of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the embodiments of the present invention is not limited to the following specific examples. In addition, "part" and "%" are based on mass unless otherwise specified.
〔ポジ型感光性樹脂層における重合体〕
 以下の例において、以下の略語はそれぞれ以下の化合物を表す。
 ATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(合成品)
 MATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレート(合成品)
 AA:アクリル酸(東京化成工業(株)製)
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 EA:アクリル酸エチル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 CHA:アクリル酸シクロヘキシル(東京化成工業(株)製)
 PGMEA(プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート):(昭和電工(株)製)
 V-601:ジメチル 2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(和光純薬工業(株)製)
[Polymer in positive photosensitive resin layer]
In the examples below, the following abbreviations respectively represent the following compounds:
ATHF: 2-tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (synthetic product)
MATHF: 2-Tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (synthetic product)
AA: Acrylic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
MMA: Methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
EA: Ethyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
CHA: cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
PGMEA (Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate): (Showa Denko KK)
V-601: Dimethyl 2,2'-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
<ATHFの合成>
 国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0166記載の方法に従って、合成した。
<Synthesis of ATHF>
It was synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0166 of WO2018 / 179640.
<MATHFの合成>
 国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0167記載の方法に従って、合成した。
<Synthesis of MATHF>
It synthesize | combined according to the method of the paragraph 0167 of international publication 2018/179640.
<重合体A-1の合成例>
 3つ口フラスコにPGMEA(75.0部)を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。ATHF(30.0部)、MMA(35.0部)、EA(35.0部)、V-601(4.0部)、PGMEA(75.0部)を加えた溶液を、90℃±2℃に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後,90℃±2℃にて2時間撹拌することで、重合体A-1(固形分濃度40.0%)を得た。Tgは、35℃、重量平均分子量(Mw)は、35,000であった。
<Synthesis Example of Polymer A-1>
PGMEA (75.0 parts) was put into a three-necked flask, and the temperature was raised to 90 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. ATHF (30.0 parts), MMA (35.0 parts), EA (35.0 parts), V-601 (4.0 parts), PGMEA (75.0 parts) was added to the solution at 90 ° C ± The solution was added dropwise to the three-necked flask solution maintained at 2 ° C over 2 hours. After the dropping was completed, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain a polymer A-1 (solid content concentration 40.0%). The Tg was 35 ° C. and the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 35,000.
<重合体A-2の合成例>
 モノマーをMATHF(40.0部)、AA(3.0部)、CHA(57.0部)に変更し、その他の条件については、A-1と同様の方法で合成した。重合体の固形分濃度は40質量%とした。Tgは、48℃、重量平均分子量(Mw)は、25,000であった。
<Synthesis Example of Polymer A-2>
The monomer was changed to MATHF (40.0 parts), AA (3.0 parts) and CHA (57.0 parts), and the other conditions were the same as in A-1. The solid content concentration of the polymer was 40% by mass. The Tg was 48 ° C. and the weight average molecular weight (Mw) was 25,000.
<重合体A-3の合成例>
 特開2014-85643号公報の段落0232に記載の方法に従って、重合体A-3(下記構造のPHS-EVE、重量平均分子量:20,000)を得た。下記構造において、各構成単位の数値は、各構成単位の含有量(質量%)を表す。
<Synthesis Example of Polymer A-3>
Polymer A-3 (PHS-EVE having the following structure, weight average molecular weight: 20,000) was obtained according to the method described in paragraph 0232 of JP-A-2014-85643. In the following structure, the numerical value of each structural unit represents the content (mass%) of each structural unit.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
〔光酸発生剤〕
 B-1:BASF社製Irgacure PAG-103、下記化合物
[Photo acid generator]
B-1: Irgacure PAG-103 manufactured by BASF, the following compound
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 B-2:下記に示す構造の化合物(特開2013-47765号公報の段落0227に記載の化合物であり、段落0227に記載の方法に従って合成した。) B-2: a compound having the structure shown below (a compound described in paragraph 0227 of JP 2013-47765 A, which was synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
〔界面活性剤〕
 E-1:下記に示す構造の化合物
[Surfactant]
E-1: Compound having the structure shown below
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
〔塩基性化合物〕
 D-1:N-シクロヘキシル-N’-[2-(4-モルホリニル)エチル]チオ尿素(東洋化成工業(株)製、品番:CMTU)
[Basic compound]
D-1: N-cyclohexyl-N '-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea (manufactured by Toyo Kasei Co., Ltd., product number: CMTU)
<感光性樹脂組成物1の作製>
 以下の組成で調合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、感光性樹脂組成物1を得た。
<Preparation of Photosensitive Resin Composition 1>
Photosensitive resin composition 1 was obtained by blending with the following composition and filtering with a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore size of 0.2 μm.
〔感光性樹脂組成物1の組成〕
 PGMEA:424.5質量部
 重合体A-1:237.0質量部
 光酸発生剤B-2:5.0質量部
 界面活性剤E-1:0.1質量部
 塩基性化合物D-1:0.1質量部
[Composition of Photosensitive Resin Composition 1]
PGMEA: 424.5 parts by mass Polymer A-1: 237.0 parts by mass Photoacid generator B-2: 5.0 parts by mass Surfactant E-1: 0.1 parts by mass Basic compound D-1: 0.1 parts by mass
<中間層形成用組成物1の作製>
 以下の組成で各成分を混合し、中間層形成用組成物1を作製した。
<Preparation of Composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer>
Each component was mixed in the following composition to prepare a composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer.
〔中間層形成用組成物1の組成〕
・純水:33.7質量部
・メタノール:61.2質量部
・ヒドロキシプロピルセルロース(HPC、日本曹達(株)製HPC-SSL):5.0質量部
・メガファックF-569(F-569、DIC(株)製、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤(オリゴマー)、分子量700以上のものを含む。):0.1質量部
[Composition of Composition 1 for Forming Intermediate Layer]
-Pure water: 33.7 parts by mass-Methanol: 61.2 parts by mass-Hydroxypropyl cellulose (HPC, HPC-SSL manufactured by Nippon Soda Co., Ltd.): 5.0 parts by mass-Megafuck F-569 (F-569) Manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd., including fluorine atom-containing nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a molecular weight of 700 or more.): 0.1 part by mass
〔中間層形成用組成物2~16の作製〕
 中間層形成用組成物1における水溶性樹脂及び界面活性剤の種類、及び、界面活性剤の添加量を下記表1の記載のように変更した以外は、中間層形成用組成物1の作製と同様の方法により、中間層形成用組成物2~16をそれぞれ作製した。
[Preparation of Compositions 2 to 16 for Forming Intermediate Layer]
Preparation of the intermediate layer forming composition 1 except that the types of the water-soluble resin and the surfactant in the intermediate layer forming composition 1 and the addition amount of the surfactant were changed as described in Table 1 below. By the same method, intermediate layer forming compositions 2 to 16 were prepared.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000010
 なお、上記表1に記載の界面活性剤はすべて、25℃の蒸留水100gに対して1.0g以上溶解した。
 また、上述した以外の表1に記載の略称の詳細を、以下に示す。
 HPMC:ヒドロキシプロピルメチルセルロース、信越化学工業(株)製TC-5E 低分子量タイプ
 F-114:メガファックF-114、DIC(株)製、パーフルオロアルキル基及びスルホン酸基を有するアニオン性界面活性剤、分子量700以上のものを含まない。
 F-410:メガファックF-410、DIC(株)製、パーフルオロアルキル基及びカルボキシ基を有するアニオン性界面活性剤、分子量700以上のものを含まない。
 F-444:メガファックF-444、DIC(株)製、パーフルオロアルキル基及びアルキレンオキシ基を有するノニオン性界面活性剤、分子量700以上のものを含まない。
 F-477:メガファックF-477、DIC(株)製、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤(オリゴマー)、分子量700以上のものを含む。
 F-510:メガファックF-510、DIC(株)製、パーフルオロアルキル基及びリン酸基を有するアニオン性界面活性剤(オリゴマー)、分子量700以上のものを含む。
 F-553:メガファックF-553、DIC(株)製、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤(オリゴマー)、分子量700以上のものを含む。
 F-556:メガファックF-556、DIC(株)製、フッ素原子有するノニオン性界面活性剤(オリゴマー)、分子量700以上のものを含む。
 F-559:メガファックF-556、DIC(株)製、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤(オリゴマー)、分子量700以上のものを含む。
 R-94:メガファックR-94、DIC(株)製、フッ素原子を有するノニオン性界面活性剤(オリゴマー)、分子量700以上のものを含む。
All the surfactants listed in Table 1 were dissolved in 100 g of distilled water at 25 ° C. in an amount of 1.0 g or more.
Further, details of the abbreviations described in Table 1 other than the above are shown below.
HPMC: Hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, TC-5E low molecular weight type manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. F-114: Megafac F-114, manufactured by DIC Corporation, an anionic surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a sulfonic acid group. , Those having a molecular weight of 700 or more are not included.
F-410: Megafac F-410, manufactured by DIC Corporation, does not include anionic surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a carboxy group and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
F-444: Megafac F-444, manufactured by DIC Corporation, does not include a nonionic surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and an alkyleneoxy group and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
F-477: Megafac F-477, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
F-510: Megafac F-510, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including an anionic surfactant (oligomer) having a perfluoroalkyl group and a phosphoric acid group, having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
F-553: Includes Megafac F-553, manufactured by DIC Corporation, a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom, and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
F-556: Megafac F-556, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a fluorine atom-containing nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
F-559: Megafac F-556, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
R-94: Megafac R-94, manufactured by DIC Corporation, including a nonionic surfactant (oligomer) having a fluorine atom and having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
(実施例1)
<転写材料の作製>
 ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム(仮支持体、厚さ25μm)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて上記中間層形成用組成物1を乾燥膜厚が1.6μmとなる量で塗布した。上記中間層形成用組成物1の乾燥後、その上に更に中間層形成用組成物1を、スリット状ノズルを用いて0.4μmとなる量で再度塗布した。
 上記中間層形成用組成物1の乾燥後、その上に上記感光性樹脂組成物1を乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。
 その後、100℃の温風にて乾燥させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して、実施例1の転写材料(感光性転写材料)を作製した。
(Example 1)
<Preparation of transfer material>
Onto a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film (temporary support, thickness: 25 μm), the above composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was applied in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 1.6 μm using a slit nozzle. After the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was dried, the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was further applied thereon by an amount of 0.4 μm using a slit nozzle.
After drying the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm.
Then, it was dried with warm air at 100 ° C., and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar Co., Ltd.) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a transfer material (photosensitive transfer material) of Example 1.
(実施例2~実施例14)
 中間層形成組成物1を中間層形成組成物2~中間層形成組成物14に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例2~実施例14の転写材料をそれぞれ作製した。
(Examples 2 to 14)
Transfer materials of Examples 2 to 14 were prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was changed to the composition 2 for forming an intermediate layer to the composition 14 for forming an intermediate layer.
(実施例15)
 PETフィルム(仮支持体、厚さ25μm)の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて上記中間層形成用組成物4を乾燥膜厚が1.6μmとなる量で塗布した。上記中間層形成用組成物4の乾燥後、その上に更に中間層形成用組成物15を、スリット状ノズルを用いて0.4μmとなる量で再度塗布した。
 上記中間層形成用組成物15の乾燥後、その上に上記感光性樹脂組成物1を乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。
 その後、100℃の温風にて乾燥させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して、実施例15の転写材料を作製した。
(Example 15)
The composition 4 for forming an intermediate layer was applied onto a PET film (temporary support, thickness: 25 μm) using a slit-shaped nozzle in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 1.6 μm. After the composition 4 for forming an intermediate layer was dried, the composition 15 for forming an intermediate layer was further applied thereon by an amount of 0.4 μm using a slit nozzle.
After drying the composition 15 for forming the intermediate layer, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm.
Then, it was dried with warm air of 100 ° C., and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar Co., Ltd.) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a transfer material of Example 15.
(実施例16)
 感光性樹脂組成物1の乾燥膜厚を5.0μmとなる量で塗布した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例16の転写材料を作製した。
(Example 16)
A transfer material of Example 16 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the dry film thickness of the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied in an amount of 5.0 μm.
(実施例17及び実施例18)
 感光性樹脂組成物1を感光性樹脂組成物2又は感光性樹脂組成物3に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、実施例17又は実施例18の転写材料を作製した。
(Examples 17 and 18)
A transfer material of Example 17 or Example 18 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the photosensitive resin composition 1 was changed to the photosensitive resin composition 2 or the photosensitive resin composition 3.
<感光性樹脂組成物2及び3の作製>
 以下の組成で調合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過することで、感光性樹脂組成物2及び3をそれぞれ得た。
<Preparation of Photosensitive Resin Compositions 2 and 3>
Photosensitive resin compositions 2 and 3 were obtained by blending with the following composition and filtering with a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore size of 0.2 μm.
〔感光性樹脂組成物2の組成〕
 PGMEA:424.5質量部
 重合体A-2:237.0質量部
 光酸発生剤B-2:5.0質量部
 界面活性剤E-1:0.1質量部
 塩基性化合物D-1:0.1質量部
[Composition of Photosensitive Resin Composition 2]
PGMEA: 424.5 parts by mass Polymer A-2: 237.0 parts by mass Photoacid generator B-2: 5.0 parts by mass Surfactant E-1: 0.1 parts by mass Basic compound D-1: 0.1 parts by mass
〔感光性樹脂組成物3の組成〕
 PGMEA:424.5質量部
 重合体A-3:237.0質量部
 光酸発生剤B-1:5.0質量部
 界面活性剤E-1:0.1質量部
 塩基性化合物D-1:0.1質量部
[Composition of Photosensitive Resin Composition 3]
PGMEA: 424.5 parts by mass Polymer A-3: 237.0 parts by mass Photoacid generator B-1: 5.0 parts by mass Surfactant E-1: 0.1 parts by mass Basic compound D-1: 0.1 parts by mass
(実施例19)
<転写材料の作製>
 PETの上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて上記中間層形成用組成物1を乾燥膜厚が1.6μmとなる量で塗布した。
 上記中間層形成用組成物1の乾燥後、その上に上記感光性樹脂組成物1を乾燥膜厚が3.0μmとなる量で塗布した。
 その後、100℃の温風にて乾燥させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して、実施例19の転写材料を作製した。
(Example 19)
<Preparation of transfer material>
The composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was applied onto PET using a slit-shaped nozzle in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 1.6 μm.
After drying the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer, the photosensitive resin composition 1 was applied thereon in an amount such that the dry film thickness was 3.0 μm.
Then, it was dried with warm air of 100 ° C., and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N, manufactured by Tredegar Co., Ltd.) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a transfer material of Example 19.
(比較例1)
 中間層形成用組成物1を中間層形成用組成物16に変更した以外は、実施例1と同様にして、比較例1の転写材料を作製した。
(Comparative Example 1)
A transfer material of Comparative Example 1 was produced in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the composition 1 for forming an intermediate layer was changed to the composition 16 for forming an intermediate layer.
<スジ評価>
 作製した転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、転写材料に蛍光灯の光をあて、斜め45°から目視にて、スジの見え方を評価した。本開示に係る転写材料における「スジ」とは、転写材料における転写される面(転写面、上記実施例及び比較例であれば、カバーフィルムを剥離した感光性樹脂層の表面)にスジ状の凹凸形状が生じる故障を表す。上記スジは、転写材料作製時の搬送方向に平行に上記スジが発生する場合が多い。上記スジが発生していると、転写した際に、スジ部分に気泡が入る場合が多く、パターン形状における欠陥(パターン抜け、パターン倒れ等)、及び、回路配線を作製するためのエッチングレジストとして転写材料を使用した場合に配線欠陥が多く生じる可能性が高くなる。
 A又はBであることが好ましく、Aであることがより好ましい。
-評価基準-
  A:15cmの距離から観察しても、40cmの距離から観察しても、スジが見えない。
  B:40cmの距離から観察するとスジが見えないが、15cmの距離から観察するとスジが見える。
  C:15cmの距離から観察しても、40cmの距離から観察しても、スジがはっきり見える。
<Strip evaluation>
The cover film was peeled off from the produced transfer material, the light of a fluorescent lamp was applied to the transfer material, and the appearance of the streaks was evaluated visually at an angle of 45 °. The “streaks” in the transfer material according to the present disclosure are stripes on the surface to be transferred in the transfer material (transfer surface, in the above-described Examples and Comparative Examples, the surface of the photosensitive resin layer from which the cover film has been peeled off). Indicates a failure that causes unevenness. In many cases, the streaks are generated in parallel with the conveying direction when the transfer material is manufactured. When the above-mentioned streaks are generated, bubbles often enter the streaks when transferred, and defects in the pattern shape (pattern omission, pattern collapse, etc.) and transfer as an etching resist for making circuit wiring When a material is used, many wiring defects are likely to occur.
It is preferably A or B, and more preferably A.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: No streak is visible when observed from a distance of 15 cm or 40 cm.
B: Streaks are not visible when observed from a distance of 40 cm, but streaks are visible when observed from a distance of 15 cm.
C: Streaks are clearly visible when observed from a distance of 15 cm or 40 cm.
<配線欠陥の評価>
-基板の作製-
 厚さ200μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に厚さ250nmでスパッタリング法にて銅層を形成したロール状基板(銅層付きPET基板)を作製した。
<Evaluation of wiring defects>
-Substrate fabrication-
A roll-shaped substrate (PET substrate with a copper layer) was prepared by forming a copper layer on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 200 μm with a thickness of 250 nm by a sputtering method.
-配線欠陥の評価-
 作製した転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)4.0m/minのラミネート条件で銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。線幅6μmのラインアンドスペースパターン(Duty比 1:1)マスクと仮支持体とを接触させ、超高圧水銀灯で露光後、23℃で3時間引き置いた後に現像した。現像は28℃の1.0質量%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で40秒間行った。上記方法にて線幅6μmのラインアンドスペースパターンを形成し、ライン幅とスペース幅との比が1:1になる露光量を求めた。その露光量における線幅6μmのラインアンドスペースパターンを上記方法により形成し、銅エッチング液(Cu-02、関東化学(株)製)に25℃で5分間浸漬することによりエッチングを行い、正方形状の銅パターン配線を作製した。得られた銅パターン配線を光学顕微鏡で観察した。銅パターン配線における0.26mm×0.20mmの観察面積を1ショットとして、銅パターン配線の中央部及び上記正方形状の4隅において、計5ショットにおける銅パターン配線の配線欠陥の数を計測した。5ショットの内で、1ショットにおける配線の断線(オープン)及び配線同士の結合(ショート)の配線欠陥の合計数の最大数により以下の評価を行った。A又はBであることが好ましい。
  A:銅パターンの欠陥が全く視認されない。
  B:銅パターンの欠陥数が1個以上4個以下である。
  C:銅パターンの欠陥数が5個以上である。
-Evaluation of wiring defects-
The cover film was peeled from the produced transfer material, and laminated on a PET substrate with a copper layer under laminating conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminating speed) of 4.0 m / min. A line-and-space pattern (Duty ratio 1: 1) mask having a line width of 6 μm was brought into contact with a temporary support, exposed by an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, left at 23 ° C. for 3 hours, and then developed. The development was carried out for 40 seconds by shower development using a 1.0% by mass sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 28 ° C. A line-and-space pattern having a line width of 6 μm was formed by the above method, and the exposure amount at which the ratio of the line width to the space width was 1: 1 was determined. A line-and-space pattern having a line width of 6 μm at the exposure amount was formed by the above method, and etching was performed by immersing in a copper etching solution (Cu-02, manufactured by Kanto Kagaku Co., Ltd.) at 25 ° C. for 5 minutes to form a square shape. The copper pattern wiring of was produced. The obtained copper pattern wiring was observed with an optical microscope. The observation area of 0.26 mm × 0.20 mm in the copper pattern wiring was taken as one shot, and the number of wiring defects of the copper pattern wiring was measured in a total of 5 shots at the central portion of the copper pattern wiring and the four corners of the square shape. Among the five shots, the following evaluation was performed by the maximum number of the total number of wiring defects of disconnection (open) of wiring and coupling (short) of wiring in one shot. It is preferably A or B.
A: No defects of the copper pattern are visually recognized.
B: The number of defects in the copper pattern is 1 or more and 4 or less.
C: The number of defects in the copper pattern is 5 or more.
<密着性の評価>
 作製した転写材料からカバーフィルムを剥離し、ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.6MPa、線速度(ラミネート速度)4.0m/minのラミネート条件で上記銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。次に、4.5cm×10cmにカットしてサンプルを作製し、上記銅層付きPET基板側を試料台の上に固定した。
 引張圧縮試験機((株)今田製作所製、SV-55)を用いて、180度の方向に、5.5mm/秒で上記銅層付きPET基板を引っ張って、中間層と仮支持体との間で剥離して、密着力を測定した。
 測定された密着力(N/cm)を密着性の指標とし、下記評価基準に従って評価した。密着力が大きいほど密着性に優れるといえる。評価結果は表2に記載した。
-評価基準-
  A:密着力が0.098N/cmを超える。
  B:密着力が0.069N/cm~0.098N/cmである。
  C:密着力が0.069N/cm未満である。
<Adhesion evaluation>
The cover film was peeled off from the produced transfer material, and laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer under the laminating conditions of a laminating roll temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.6 MPa, and a linear velocity (laminating speed) of 4.0 m / min. Next, a sample was prepared by cutting into 4.5 cm × 10 cm, and the PET substrate side with the copper layer was fixed on a sample table.
Using a tensile compression tester (SV-55 manufactured by Imada Seisakusho Co., Ltd.), the PET substrate with the copper layer was pulled in a direction of 180 degrees at 5.5 mm / sec to form an intermediate layer and a temporary support. It peeled between and measured the adhesive force.
The measured adhesive force (N / cm) was used as an index of adhesiveness and evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. It can be said that the greater the adhesion, the better the adhesion. The evaluation results are shown in Table 2.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: Adhesion exceeds 0.098 N / cm.
B: The adhesion is 0.069 N / cm to 0.098 N / cm.
C: Adhesion is less than 0.069 N / cm.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000011
 上記表2より、実施例1~19の転写材料は、比較例1の転写材料と比べ、転写される表面におけるスジが少ないことがわかる。
 また、上記表2より、実施例1~19の転写材料は、転写における密着性にも優れ、また、エッチングレジストとして転写材料を使用した場合における配線欠陥も少ない。
It can be seen from Table 2 above that the transfer materials of Examples 1 to 19 have less streaks on the surface to be transferred than the transfer materials of Comparative Example 1.
Further, from Table 2 above, the transfer materials of Examples 1 to 19 are excellent in adhesion in transfer, and there are few wiring defects when the transfer material is used as an etching resist.
(実施例101)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成用基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得られた転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.)、積層体とした。得られた積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図2に示すパターン(以下、「パターンA」とも称する。)を設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。
 なお、図2に示すパターンAは、実線部SL及びグレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図3に示すパターン(以下、「パターンB」とも称する。)の開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。
 なお、図3に示すパターンBは、グレー部Gが遮光部であり、点線部DLはアライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。
 その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 101)
On a PET substrate having a thickness of 100 μm, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method. And used as a circuit forming substrate.
The transfer material obtained in Example 1 was attached to the substrate on the copper layer (laminating roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. A photomask provided with a pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern A”) shown in FIG. 2 having a structure in which conductive layer pads are connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support is obtained. The contact pattern was exposed by using.
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, the solid line portion SL and the gray portion G are light-shielding portions, and the dotted line portion DL virtually shows a frame for alignment alignment.
Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, and development and washing were carried out to obtain pattern A. Then, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in the pattern A was obtained.
Next, in alignment, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with openings of the pattern shown in FIG. 3 (hereinafter, also referred to as “pattern B”), and development and washing were performed.
In the pattern B shown in FIG. 3, the gray part G is a light-shielding part, and the dotted line part DL is a virtual frame for alignment.
Then, the copper layer was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was stripped using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and it was a clean pattern.
(実施例102)
 100μm厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得られた転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.)、積層体とした。得られた積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層としてPET(A)をラミネートした。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態でパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、PET(A)を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 102)
On a PET substrate having a thickness of 100 μm, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method. And used as a circuit formation substrate.
The transfer material obtained in Example 1 was attached to the substrate on the copper layer (laminating roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. The obtained laminated body was pattern-exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Thereafter, the temporary support was peeled off, and development and washing were carried out to obtain pattern A. Then, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in the pattern A was obtained.
Then, PET (A) was laminated as a protective layer on the remaining resist. In this state, pattern exposure was performed using a photomask provided with openings for the pattern B in alignment with each other, and the PET (A) was peeled off, followed by development and washing with water. Then, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a peeling solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and it was a clean pattern.
(実施例103)
 100μm厚シクロオレフィンポリマー(COP)基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、導電パターン形成用の基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得られた転写材料を基板に貼り合わせて(ラミネートロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.)、積層体とした。得られた積層体を、仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAで描画された樹脂パターンを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングし、剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離することで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に、実施例1で得られた転写材料を貼り合わせた(ロール温度100℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度3.0m/min.)。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態でパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、転写材料の仮支持体を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、導電パターンを有する回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路配線基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれ、欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
(Example 103)
On a 100 μm-thick cycloolefin polymer (COP) substrate, ITO was deposited as a second conductive layer to a thickness of 150 nm by sputtering, and copper was deposited thereon as a first conductive layer to a thickness of 200 nm by a vacuum deposition method. To form a substrate for forming a conductive pattern.
The transfer material obtained in Example 1 was attached to the substrate on the copper layer (laminating roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.) To obtain a laminate. The obtained laminated body was pattern-exposed using a photomask provided with a pattern A having a configuration in which conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. After that, the temporary support was peeled off, developed and washed with water to obtain a resin pattern drawn with pattern A. Then, after etching the copper layer using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), the ITO layer is etched using an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) By peeling using (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.), a substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in the pattern A was obtained.
Then, the transfer material obtained in Example 1 was bonded onto the remaining resist (roll temperature 100 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 3.0 m / min.). In this state, pattern alignment was performed using a photomask provided with an opening for the pattern B, and the temporary support of the transfer material was peeled off, followed by development and washing with water. Then, the copper wiring was etched using Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off using a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board having a conductive pattern. ..
When the obtained circuit wiring board was observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and it was a clean pattern.
 2018年11月20日に出願された日本国特許出願第2018-217753号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。
 本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。
The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-217753 filed on Nov. 20, 2018 is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
All documents, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned in this specification are to the same extent as if each individual document, patent application, and technical standard were specifically and individually noted to be incorporated by reference. Are incorporated herein by reference.
 10:仮支持体、12:中間層、14:感光性樹脂層、16:カバーフィルム、100:転写材料、SL:実線部、G:グレー部、DL:点線部 10: temporary support, 12: intermediate layer, 14: photosensitive resin layer, 16: cover film, 100: transfer material, SL: solid line part, G: gray part, DL: dotted line part

Claims (12)

  1.  仮支持体と、
     水溶性樹脂を含む中間層と、
     ポジ型感光性樹脂層と、をこの順に有し、
     前記中間層が、フッ素原子を有する界面活性剤を含む
     転写材料。
    A temporary support,
    An intermediate layer containing a water-soluble resin,
    Having a positive photosensitive resin layer, in this order,
    The transfer material, wherein the intermediate layer contains a surfactant having a fluorine atom.
  2.  前記界面活性剤が、分子量700以上の化合物を含む請求項1に記載の転写材料。 The transfer material according to claim 1, wherein the surfactant contains a compound having a molecular weight of 700 or more.
  3.  前記界面活性剤の25℃の水100gに対する溶解度が、1g以上である請求項1又は請求項2に記載の転写材料。 The transfer material according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the solubility of the surfactant in 100 g of water at 25 ° C is 1 g or more.
  4.  前記界面活性剤の含有量が、前記中間層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%~1.0質量%である請求項1~請求項3のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料。 The transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the content of the surfactant is 0.1% by mass to 1.0% by mass with respect to the total mass of the intermediate layer.
  5.  前記界面活性剤が、フルオロアルキル基とアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤である請求項1~請求項4のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料。 The transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the surfactant is a surfactant having a fluoroalkyl group and an alkyleneoxy group.
  6.  前記界面活性剤が、パーフルオロアルキル基とポリアルキレンオキシ基とを有する界面活性剤である請求項1~請求項5のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料。 The transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the surfactant is a surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group and a polyalkyleneoxy group.
  7.  前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層における重合体成分の含有量が、前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、75質量%以上である請求項1~請求項6のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料。 7. The content of the polymer component in the positive photosensitive resin layer is 75% by mass or more based on the total mass of the positive photosensitive resin layer, according to any one of claims 1 to 6. Transfer material.
  8.  前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層が、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位を含有する重合体、及び、光酸発生剤を含む請求項1~請求項7のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料。 8. The positive type photosensitive resin layer according to claim 1, wherein the positive type photosensitive resin layer contains a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group, and a photo-acid generator. The transfer material described.
  9.  前記酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位が、下記式A1~式A3のいずれかにより表される構成単位である請求項8に記載の転写材料。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     式A1中、R11及びR12はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR11及びR12のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R13はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R11又はR12と、R13とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R14は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表し、R15は置換基を表し、nは0~4の整数を表す。
     式A2中、R21及びR22はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR21及びR22のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R23はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R21又はR22と、R23とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R24はそれぞれ独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アリールカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基又はシクロアルキル基を表し、mは0~3の整数を表す。
     式A3中、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基又はアリール基を表し、少なくともR31及びR32のいずれか一方がアルキル基又はアリール基であり、R33はアルキル基又はアリール基を表し、R31又はR32と、R33とが連結して環状エーテルを形成してもよく、R34は水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Xは単結合又は二価の連結基を表す。
    9. The transfer material according to claim 8, wherein the structural unit having an acid group protected by an acid-decomposable group is a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas A1 to A3.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In formula A1, R 11 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 11 and R 12 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 13 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 14 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 1 is a single bond or a divalent linking group. R 15 represents a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 to 4.
    In formula A2, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 21 and R 22 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 23 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, and R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, and R 24 is independently a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, It represents an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group or a cycloalkyl group, and m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
    In formula A3, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, at least one of R 31 and R 32 is an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R 33 is an alkyl group or It represents an aryl group, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be linked to form a cyclic ether, R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Represents.
  10.  請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料における前記仮支持体に対してポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
     上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む
     樹脂パターンの製造方法。
    A step of bringing the outermost layer of the transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 9 on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer into contact with the temporary support, and bonding the substrate to the temporary support;
    A step of pattern-exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer,
    And a step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern in this order.
  11.  請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料における前記仮支持体に対して前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
    上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、
     前記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における前記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
     回路配線の製造方法。
    The outermost layer on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 9 is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer to be attached. The process of matching
    A step of pattern-exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer,
    A step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern,
    And a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged, in this order.
  12.  請求項1~請求項9のいずれか1項に記載の転写材料における前記仮支持体に対して前記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を有する側の最外層を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせる工程と、
    上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された上記ポジ型感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、
     前記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における前記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む
     タッチパネルの製造方法。
    The outermost layer on the side having the positive photosensitive resin layer with respect to the temporary support in the transfer material according to any one of claims 1 to 9 is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer to be attached. The process of matching
    A step of pattern-exposing the positive photosensitive resin layer,
    A step of developing the exposed positive photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern,
    And a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged, in this order.
PCT/JP2019/043695 2018-11-20 2019-11-07 Transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method WO2020105457A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020558258A JPWO2020105457A1 (en) 2018-11-20 2019-11-07 Transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
CN201980075793.4A CN113056373A (en) 2018-11-20 2019-11-07 Transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018-217753 2018-11-20
JP2018217753 2018-11-20

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020105457A1 true WO2020105457A1 (en) 2020-05-28

Family

ID=70773604

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2019/043695 WO2020105457A1 (en) 2018-11-20 2019-11-07 Transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2020105457A1 (en)
CN (1) CN113056373A (en)
WO (1) WO2020105457A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111816808A (en) * 2020-07-10 2020-10-23 RealMe重庆移动通信有限公司 Battery cover, shell assembly and electronic equipment
WO2021246251A1 (en) * 2020-06-02 2021-12-09 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film and method for producing multilayer body
WO2022019046A1 (en) * 2020-07-20 2022-01-27 昭和電工マテリアルズ株式会社 Photosensitive element, resist pattern forming method, and method for manufacturing printed wiring board
WO2022044963A1 (en) * 2020-08-24 2022-03-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film, laminate manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and electronic device manufacturing method

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005215137A (en) * 2004-01-28 2005-08-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, protrusion for liquid crystal orientation control and method for producing same, and liquid crystal display device
WO2011040083A1 (en) * 2009-09-29 2011-04-07 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored photosensitive resin composition, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
WO2016175220A1 (en) * 2015-04-28 2016-11-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Laminate and kit
JP2017078852A (en) * 2015-10-21 2017-04-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, method for producing circuit wiring, circuit wiring, input device and display device
WO2018012635A1 (en) * 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film, film sensor, and method for manufacturing film sensor

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6267951B2 (en) * 2013-12-18 2018-01-24 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material, pattern forming method and etching method
JP6573545B2 (en) * 2015-12-21 2019-09-11 富士フイルム株式会社 Positive photosensitive transfer material and method of manufacturing circuit wiring
CN107132731B (en) * 2016-02-26 2021-10-15 富士胶片株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP6683890B2 (en) * 2017-03-30 2020-04-22 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing circuit wiring

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005215137A (en) * 2004-01-28 2005-08-11 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, protrusion for liquid crystal orientation control and method for producing same, and liquid crystal display device
WO2011040083A1 (en) * 2009-09-29 2011-04-07 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored photosensitive resin composition, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
WO2016175220A1 (en) * 2015-04-28 2016-11-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Laminate and kit
JP2017078852A (en) * 2015-10-21 2017-04-27 富士フイルム株式会社 Dry film resist, method for producing circuit wiring, circuit wiring, input device and display device
WO2018012635A1 (en) * 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film, film sensor, and method for manufacturing film sensor

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021246251A1 (en) * 2020-06-02 2021-12-09 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film and method for producing multilayer body
CN111816808A (en) * 2020-07-10 2020-10-23 RealMe重庆移动通信有限公司 Battery cover, shell assembly and electronic equipment
CN111816808B (en) * 2020-07-10 2022-08-05 RealMe重庆移动通信有限公司 Battery cover, shell assembly and electronic equipment
WO2022019046A1 (en) * 2020-07-20 2022-01-27 昭和電工マテリアルズ株式会社 Photosensitive element, resist pattern forming method, and method for manufacturing printed wiring board
WO2022044963A1 (en) * 2020-08-24 2022-03-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer film, laminate manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and electronic device manufacturing method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113056373A (en) 2021-06-29
JPWO2020105457A1 (en) 2021-10-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020105457A1 (en) Transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, and touch panel production method
JP6683890B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP6999693B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
JP6574846B2 (en) Dry film resist, circuit wiring manufacturing method, circuit wiring, input device and display device
JP2022069472A (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, manufacturing method of resin pattern, as well as, manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JPWO2019044138A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing the same, and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
WO2020158316A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, touch panel production method, and, film and production method therefor
JP7007308B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP6812556B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2022019321A1 (en) Composition, transfer film, method for producing laminate, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing electronic device
WO2022044963A1 (en) Transfer film, laminate manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2021261469A1 (en) Composition, transfer film, method for producing laminate, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing electronic device
WO2022045002A1 (en) Transfer film, method for manufacturing layered body, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing electronic device
JP6968273B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2019151534A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel
TW201942680A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resist pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, touch panel, and touch panel display device
JP7102517B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2024024864A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing same, method for manufacturing resin pattern, and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
JP6808045B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
TW202112856A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing wiring line, and method for producing touch panel
JPWO2020174767A1 (en) Patterned board manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
TW201938384A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
TW202413096A (en) Photosensitive transfer material, and method for manufacturing thereof, method for manufacturing resin pattern, and method for manufacturing circuit wiring

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19887422

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020558258

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19887422

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1